Trend Zone Moving Averages📈 Trend Zone Moving Averages
The Trend Zone Moving Averages indicator helps traders quickly identify market trends using the 50SMA, 100SMA, and 200SMA. With dynamic background colors, customizable settings, and real-time alerts, this tool provides a clear view of bullish, bearish, and extreme trend conditions.
🔹 Features:
Trend Zones with Dynamic Background Colors
Green → Bullish Trend (50SMA > 100SMA > 200SMA, price above 50SMA)
Red → Bearish Trend (50SMA < 100SMA < 200SMA, price below 50SMA)
Yellow → Neutral Trend (Mixed signals)
Dark Green → Extreme Bullish (Price above all three SMAs)
Dark Red → Extreme Bearish (Price below all three SMAs)
Customizable Moving Averages
Toggle 50SMA, 100SMA, and 200SMA on/off from the settings.
Perfect for traders who prefer a cleaner chart.
Real-Time Trend Alerts
Get instant notifications when the trend changes:
🟢 Bullish Zone Alert – When price enters a bullish trend.
🔴 Bearish Zone Alert – When price enters a bearish trend.
🟡 Neutral Zone Alert – When trend shifts to neutral.
🌟 Extreme Bullish Alert – When price moves above all SMAs.
⚠️ Extreme Bearish Alert – When price drops below all SMAs.
✅ Perfect for Any Market
Works on stocks, forex, crypto, and commodities.
Adaptable for day traders, swing traders, and investors.
⚙️ How to Use: Trend Zone Moving Averages Strategy
This strategy helps traders identify and trade with the trend using the Trend Zone Moving Averages indicator. It works across stocks, forex, crypto, and commodities.
🟢 Bullish Trend Strategy (Green Background)
Objective: Look for buying opportunities when the market is in an uptrend.
Entry Conditions:
✅ Background is Green (Bullish Zone).
✅ Price is above the 50SMA (confirming strength).
✅ Price pulls back to the 50SMA and bounces OR breaks above a key resistance level.
Stop Loss:
🔹 Place below the most recent swing low or just under the 50SMA.
Take Profit:
🔹 First target at the next resistance level or recent swing high.
🔹 Second target if price continues higher—trail stops to lock in profits.
🔴 Bearish Trend Strategy (Red Background)
Objective: Look for shorting opportunities when the market is in a downtrend.
Entry Conditions:
✅ Background is Red (Bearish Zone).
✅ Price is below the 50SMA (confirming weakness).
✅ Price pulls back to the 50SMA and rejects OR breaks below a key support level.
Stop Loss:
🔹 Place above the most recent swing high or just above the 50SMA.
Take Profit:
🔹 First target at the next support level or recent swing low.
🔹 Second target if price keeps falling—trail stops to secure profits.
🌟 Extreme Trend Strategy (Dark Green / Dark Red Background)
Objective: Trade with momentum when the market is in a strong trend.
Entry Conditions:
✅ Dark Green Background → Extreme Bullish: Price is above all three SMAs (strong uptrend).
✅ Dark Red Background → Extreme Bearish: Price is below all three SMAs (strong downtrend).
Trade Execution:
🔹 For longs (Dark Green): Look for breakout entries above resistance or pullbacks to the 50SMA.
🔹 For shorts (Dark Red): Look for breakdown entries below support or rejections at the 50SMA.
Risk Management:
🔹 Use tighter stop losses and trail profits aggressively to maximize gains.
🟡 Neutral Trend Strategy (Yellow Background)
Objective: Avoid trading or wait for a breakout.
What to Do:
🔹 Avoid trading in this zone—price is indecisive.
🔹 Wait for confirmation (background turns green/red) before taking a trade.
🔹 Use alerts to notify you when the trend resumes.
📌 Final Tips
Use this strategy with price action for extra confirmation.
Combine with support/resistance levels to improve accuracy.
Set alerts for trend changes so you never miss an opportunity.
Enjoy!
Cari dalam skrip untuk "profit"
EPS Line Indicator - cristianhkrOverview
The EPS Line Indicator displays the Earnings Per Share (EPS) of a publicly traded company directly on a TradingView chart. It provides a historical trend of EPS over time, allowing investors to track a company's profitability per share.
Key Features
📊 Plots actual EPS data for the selected stock.
📅 Updates quarterly as new EPS reports are released.
🔄 Smooths missing values by holding the last reported EPS.
🔍 Helps track long-term profitability trends.
How It Works
The script retrieves quarterly EPS using request.financial(syminfo.tickerid, "EARNINGS_PER_SHARE", "Q", barmerge.gaps_off).
If EPS data is missing for a given period, the last available EPS value is retained to maintain continuity.
The EPS values are plotted as a continuous green line on the chart.
A baseline at EPS = 0 is included to easily identify profitable vs. loss-making periods.
How to Use This Indicator
If the EPS line is trending upwards 📈 → The company is growing earnings per share, a strong sign of profitability.
If the EPS line is declining 📉 → The company’s EPS is shrinking, which may indicate financial weakness.
If EPS is negative (below zero) ❌ → The company is reporting losses per share, which can be a warning sign.
Limitations
Only works with stocks that report EPS data (not applicable to cryptocurrencies or commodities).
Does not adjust for stock splits or other corporate actions.
Best used on daily, weekly, or monthly charts for clear earnings trends.
Conclusion
This indicator is a powerful tool for investors who want to visualize earnings per share trends directly on a price chart. By showing how EPS evolves over time, it helps assess a company's profitability trajectory, making it useful for both fundamental analysis and long-term investing.
🚀 Use this indicator to track EPS growth and make smarter investment decisions!
Martingale8MARTINGALE8 Indicator: Comprehensive User Guide
Welcome to the MARTINGALE8 Indicator, your ultimate tool for implementing a customizable martingale trading strategy directly on TradingView! Whether you're a beginner trader or an experienced strategist, this indicator offers flexibility and clarity, empowering you to trade with confidence. Let’s dive into how you can make the most of it!
What Is the Martingale Principle?
The martingale strategy is a betting technique often used in gambling and trading. The idea is simple: double down on losing positions so that when a trade eventually succeeds, the profits will recover all previous losses and yield a small profit. In trading, this translates to placing incrementally larger buy orders as the price moves against your initial position, assuming the price will eventually reverse in your favor.
The martingale principle works under the asumption of mean reversion —that the price will eventually recover to a point where all accumulated losses are recouped, and a profit is made. By increasing order sizes at lower levels, the average entry price moves closer to the current price, reducing the price move required to reach profitability. However, like any strategy, it carries risks — if the price continues to move against your position without reversing, losses can escalate quickly .
What Does MARTINGALE8 Do?
The MARTINGALE8 Indicator is an open source script designed to:
Calculate multiple price levels (buy and take-profit) using a martingale strategy.
Allow full customization of entry size, order deviation, profit targets, and order multipliers.
Visualize key trading levels directly on the chart for better decision-making.
Provide helpful labels with real-time metrics like total cost, range analysis, and high-volume bar prices.
This indicator is ideal for traders looking to automate and refine their martingale-based trading approaches.
Features
1. Customizable Inputs
You have complete control over key parameters:
Start Price: Set a custom starting price, or let it default to the market price.
Entry Size: Choose your initial trade size (default: equivalent to 7.5 USDT).
Order Multiplier: Adjust the size of each subsequent order in the martingale sequence.
Order Deviation: Define the percentage deviation for each buy level.
Profit Deviation: Determine the target percentage deviation for take-profit levels.
Length: Specify the lookback period for market analysis (default: 84 bars).
2. Market Analysis
The script calculates key metrics, including:
Highest Volume Bar (HVB): Identifies the bar with the highest trading volume in the selected period.
Range Analysis: Computes the high-to-low range percentage to help you understand market volatility.
3. Martingale Levels
Automatically generates :
10 Buy Levels: Strategically placed below the starting price.
Take-Profit Level: A target above the starting price based on the profit deviation.
4. Cost Calculation
The script calculates the total cost of all orders, including a 10% buffer for safety, so you can plan your capital allocation effectively.
5. Visual Elements
The indicator draws clean and intuitive lines for:
Take-Profit Level: Highlighted in fuchsia.
Buy Levels: Clearly marked with aqua lines.
Zero Line: Your base price, shown in white.
Additional labels provide:
A summary of key metrics like total cost, entry price, and range.
Precise price values for the take-profit and lowest buy levels.
How to Use MARTINGALE8
Step 1: Add the Indicator to Your Chart
Click on the “Indicators” tab in TradingView.
Search for “MARTINGALE8” and add it to your chart.
Step 2: Configure the Inputs
Navigate to the Settings menu of the indicator and adjust the following parameters:
Start Price : Set your starting price or leave it as 0 to use the current market price.
Entry Size : Define the size of your initial trade (e.g., 7.5 USDT).
Order Multiplier : Choose how much larger each subsequent order should be.
Order Deviation : Specify the percentage distance between buy levels.
Profit Deviation : Set your desired percentage for the take-profit level.
Length : Adjust the number of bars to analyze for high volume.
Step 3: Visualize the Levels
The indicator will plot:
A white line for the base price.
Aqua lines for the buy levels.
A fuchsia line for the take-profit level.
Step 4: Monitor the Labels
Look for the summary label on the chart, which shows:
Total cost of the martingale orders.
Entry price and key market metrics (range, high-volume bar price).
Tips for Optimal Use
Adjust Inputs to Match Market Conditions : Experiment with order and profit deviations to account for volatile or steady markets.
Manage Risk : Use the cost calculation feature to ensure you allocate capital responsibly.
Technical Details
The script is written in Pine Script v6 and uses:
Switch Statements : For flexible default values.
Line Objects : To draw and update key price levels dynamically.
Labels : To display relevant trading metrics.
I’m glad to share this tool with the TradingView community. If you enjoy using MARTINGALE8, please keep it going and share your feedback. Let’s trade smarter, not harder!
Uptrick: Arbitrage OpportunityINTRODUCTION
This script, titled Uptrick: Arbitrage Monitor, is a Pine Script™ indicator that aims to help traders quickly visualize potential arbitrage scenarios across multiple cryptocurrency exchanges. Arbitrage, in general, involves taking advantage of price differences for the same asset across different trading platforms. By comparing market prices of the same symbol on two user-selected exchanges, as well as scanning a broader list of exchanges, this script attempts to signal areas where you might want to buy on one exchange and sell on another. It includes various graphical tools, calculations, and an optional Automated Detection signal feature, allowing users to incorporate more advanced data scanning into their trading decisions. Keep in mind that transaction fees must also be considered in real-world scenarios. These fees can negate potential profits and, in some cases, result in a net loss.
PURPOSE
The primary purpose of this indicator is to show potential percentage differences between the same cryptocurrency trading pairs on two different exchanges. This difference is displayed numerically, visually as a line chart, and it is also tested against user-defined thresholds. With the threshold in place, buy and sell signals can be generated. The script allows you to quickly gauge how significant a spread is between two exchanges and whether that spread surpasses a specified threshold. This is particularly useful for arbitrage trading, where an asset is bought at a lower price on one exchange and sold at a higher price on another, capitalizing on price discrepancies. By identifying these opportunities, traders can potentially secure profits across different markets.
WHY IT WAS MADE
This script was developed to help traders who frequently look for arbitrage opportunities in the fast-paced cryptocurrency market. Cryptocurrencies sometimes experience quick price divergences across different exchanges. By having an automated approach that compares and displays prices, traders can spend less time manually tracking price discrepancies and more time focusing on actual trading strategies. The script was also made with user customization in mind, allowing you to toggle an optional Automated-based approach and choose different moving average methods to smooth out the displayed price difference.
WHAT ARBITRAGE IS
Arbitrage is the practice of buying an asset on one market (or exchange) at a lower price and simultaneously selling it on another market where the price is higher, thus profiting from the price difference. In cryptocurrency markets, these price differentials can occur across multiple exchanges due to varying liquidity, trading volume, geographic factors, or market inefficiencies. Though sometimes small, these differences can be exploited for profit when approached methodically.
EXPLANATION OF INPUTS
The script includes a variety of user inputs that help tailor the indicator to your specific needs:
1. Compared Symbol 1: This is the primary symbol you want to track (for example, BTCUSDT). Make sure it's written in all capital and make sure that it's price from that exchange is available on Tradingview.
2. Compare Exchange 1: The first exchange on which the script will request pricing data for the chosen symbol.
3. Compared to Exchange: The second exchange, used for the comparison.
4. Opportunity Threshold (%): A percentage threshold that, when exceeded by the price difference, can trigger buy or sell signals.
5. Plot Style?: Allows you to choose between plotting the raw difference line or a moving average of that difference.
6. MA Type: Select among SMA, EMA, WMA, RMA, or HMA for your moving average calculation.
7. MA Length: The lookback period for the selected moving average.
8. Plot Buy/Sell Signals?: Enables or disables the plotting of arrows signaling potential buy or sell zones based on threshold crossovers.
9. Automated Detection?: Toggles an additional multi-exchange data scan feature that calculates the highest and lowest prices for the specified symbol across a predefined list of exchanges.
CALCULATIONS
At its core, the script calculates price1 and price2 using the request.security function to fetch close prices from two selected exchanges. The difference is measured as (price1 - price2) / price2 * 100. This results in a percentage that indicates how much higher or lower price1 is relative to price2. Additionally, the script calculates a slope for this difference, which helps color the line depending on whether it is trending up or down. If you choose the moving average option, the script will replace the raw difference data with one of several moving average calculations (SMA, EMA, WMA, RMA, or HMA).
The script also includes an iterative scan of up to 15 different exchanges for Automated detection, collecting the highest and lowest price across all those exchanges. If the Automated option is enabled, it compiles a potential recommendation: buy at the cheapest exchange price and sell at the most expensive one. The difference across all exchanges (allExDiffPercent) is calculated using (highestPriceAll - lowestPriceAll) / lowestPriceAll * 100.
WHAT AUTOMATED DETECTION SIGNAL DOES
If enabled, the Automated detection feature scans all 15 supported exchanges for the specified symbol. It then identifies the exchange with the highest price and the exchange with the lowest price. The script displays a recommended action: buy on the lowest-exchange price and sell on the highest-exchange price. While called “Automated,” it is essentially a multi-exchange data query that automates a portion of research by consolidating different price points. It does not replace thorough analysis or guaranteed execution; it simply provides an overview of potential extremes.
WHAT ALL-EX-DIFF IS
The variable allExDiffPercent is used to show the overall difference between the highest price and the lowest price found among the 15 pre-chosen exchanges. This figure can be useful for anyone wanting a big-picture view of how large the arbitrage spread might be across the broader market.
SIGNALS AND HOW THEY ARE GENERATED
The script provides two main modes of signal generation:
1. Raw Difference Mode: If the user chooses “Use Normal Line,” the script compares the percentage difference of the two selected exchanges (price1 and price2) to the user-defined threshold. When the difference crosses under the positive threshold, a sell signal is displayed (red arrow). Conversely, when the difference crosses above the negative threshold, a buy signal is displayed (green arrow).
2. Moving Average Mode: If the user selects “Use Moving Average,” the script instead references the moving average values (maValue). The signals fire under similar conditions but use the average line to gauge whether the threshold has been crossed.
HOW TO USE THE INDICATOR
1. Add the script to your chart in TradingView.
2. In the script’s settings panel, configure the symbol you wish to compare (for example, BTCUSDT), choose the two exchanges you want to evaluate, and set your desired threshold.
3. Optionally, pick a moving average type and length if you prefer a smoother representation of the difference.
4. Enable or disable buy/sell signals according to your preference.
5. If you’d like to see potential extremes among a broader list of exchanges, enable Automated Detection. Keep in mind that this feature runs additional security requests, so it might slow down performance on weaker devices or if you already have many scripts running.
EXCHANGES TO USE
The script currently supports up to 15 exchanges: BYBIT, BINANCE, MEXC, BLOFIN, BITGET, OKX, KUCOIN, COINBASE, COINEX, PHEMEX, POLONIEX, GATEIO, BITSTAMP, and KRAKEN. You can choose any two of these for direct comparison, and if you enable the Automated detection, it will attempt to query them all to find extremes in real time.
VISUALS
The exchanges and current prices & differences are all plotted in the table while the colored line represents the difference in the price. The two thresholds colored red are where signals are generated. A cross below the upper threshold is a sell signal and a cross above the lower threshold is a buy signal. In the line at the bottom, purple is a negative slope and aqua is a positive slope.
LIMITATIONS AND POTENTIAL PROBLEMS
If you enable too many visual elements such as signals, additional lines, and the Automated-based scanning table, you may find that your chart becomes cluttered, or text might overlap. One workaround is to remove and reapply the indicator to refresh its display. You may also want to reduce the number of displayed table rows by disabling some features if your chart becomes too crowded. Sometimes there might be an error that the price of an asset is not available on an exchange, to fix this, go and select another exchange to compare it to, or if it happens in Automated detection, choose a different asset, ideally more widely spread.
UNIQUENESS
This indicator stands out due to its multifaceted approach: it doesn’t just look at two exchanges but optionally scans up to 15 exchanges in real time, presenting users with a much broader view of the market. The dual-mode system (raw difference vs. moving average) allows for both immediate, unfiltered signals and smoother, noise-reduced signals depending on user preference. By default, it introduces dynamic visual cues through color changes when the slope of the difference transitions upward or downward. The optional Automated detection, while not a deep learning system, adds a functional intelligence layer by collating extreme price points from multiple exchanges in one place, thereby streamlining the manual research process. This combination of features gives the script a unique edge in the TradingView ecosystem, catering equally to novices wanting a straightforward approach and to advanced users looking for an aggregated multi-exchange analysis.
CONCLUSION
Uptrick: Arbitrage Monitor is a versatile and customizable Pine Script™ indicator that highlights price differences for a specified symbol between two user-selected exchanges. Through signals, threshold-based alerts, and optional Automated detection across multiple exchanges, it aims to support traders in identifying potential arbitrage opportunities quickly and efficiently. This script makes no guarantees of profitability but can serve as a valuable tool to add to your trading toolkit. Always use caution when implementing arbitrage strategies, and be mindful of market risks, exchange fees, and latency.
ADDITIONAL DISCLOSURES
This script is provided for educational and informational purposes only. It does not constitute financial advice or a guarantee of performance. Users are encouraged to conduct thorough research and consider the inherent risks of arbitrage trading. Market conditions can change rapidly, and orders may fail to execute at desired prices, especially when large price discrepancies attract competition from other traders.
TradingIQ - Reversal IQIntroducing "Reversal IQ" by TradingIQ
Reversal IQ is an exclusive trading algorithm developed by TradingIQ, designed to trade trend reversals in the market. By integrating artificial intelligence and IQ Technology, Reversal IQ analyzes historical and real-time price data to construct a dynamic trading system adaptable to various asset and timeframe combinations.
Philosophy of Reversal IQ
Reversal IQ integrates IQ Technology (AI) with the timeless concept of reversal trading. Markets follow trends that inevitably reverse at some point. Rather than relying on rigid settings or manual judgment to capture these reversals, Reversal IQ dynamically designs, creates, and executes reversal-based trading strategies.
Reversal IQ is designed to work straight out of the box. In fact, its simplicity requires just one user setting, making it incredibly straightforward to manage.
AI Aggressiveness is the only setting that controls how Reversal IQ works.
Traders don’t have to spend hours adjusting settings and trying to find what works best - Reversal IQ handles this on its own.
Key Features of Reversal IQ
Self-Learning Reversal Detection
Employs AI and IQ Technology to identify trend reversals in real-time.
AI-Generated Trading Signals
Provides reversal trading signals derived from self-learning algorithms.
Comprehensive Trading System
Offers clear entry and exit labels.
AI-Determined Profit Target and Stop Loss
Position exit levels are clearly defined and calculated by the AI once the trade is entered.
Performance Tracking
Records and presents trading performance data, easily accessible for user analysis.
Configurable AI Aggressiveness
Allows users to adjust the AI's aggressiveness to match their trading style and risk tolerance.
Long and Short Trading Capabilities
Supports both long and short positions to trade various market conditions.
IQ Channel
The IQ Channel represents what Reversal IQ considers a tradable long opportunity or a tradable short opportunity. The channel is dynamic and adjusts from chart to chart.
IQMA – Proprietary Moving Average
Introduces the IQ Moving Average (IQMA), designed to classify overarching market trends.
IQCandles – Trend Classification Tool
Complements IQMA with candlestick colors designed for trend identification and analysis.
How It Works
Reversal IQ operates on a straightforward heuristic: go long during an extended downside move and go short during an extended upside move.
What defines an "extended move" is determined by IQ Technology, TradingIQ's exclusive AI algorithm. For Reversal IQ, the algorithm assesses the extent to which historical high and low prices are breached. By learning from these price level violations, Reversal IQ adapts to trade future, similar violations in a recurring manner. It calculates a price area, distant from the current price, where a reversal is anticipated.
In simple terms, price peaks (tops) and troughs (bottoms) are stored for Reversal IQ to learn from. The degree to which these levels are violated by subsequent price movements is also recorded. Reversal IQ continuously evaluates this stored data, adapting to market volatility and raw price fluctuations to better capture price reversals.
What classifies as a price top or price bottom?
For Reversal IQ, price tops are considered the highest price attained before a significant downside reversal. Price bottoms are considered the lowest price attained before a significant upside reversal. The highest price achieved is continuously calculated before a significant counter trend price move renders the high price as a swing high. The lowest price achieved is continuously calculated before a significant counter trend price move renders the low price as a swing low.
The image above illustrates the IQ channel and explains the corresponding prices and levels
The blue lower line represents the Long Reversal Level, with the price highlighted in blue showing the Long Reversal Price.
The red upper line represents the Short Reversal Level, with the price highlighted in red showing the Short Reversal Price.
Limit orders are placed at both of these levels. As soon as either level is touched, a trade is immediately executed.
The image above shows a long position being entered after the Long Reversal Level was reached. The profit target and stop loss are calculated by Reversal IQ
The blue line indicates where the profit target is placed (acting as a limit order).
The red line shows where the stop loss is placed (acting as a stop loss order).
Green arrows indicate that the strategy entered a long position at the highlighted price level.
You can also hover over the trade labels to get more information about the trade—such as the entry price, profit target, and stop loss.
The image above demonstrates the profit target being hit for the trade. All profitable trades are marked by a blue arrow and blue line. Hover over the blue arrow to obtain more details about the trade exit.
The image above depicts a short position being entered after the Short Reversal Level was touched. The profit target and stop loss are calculated by the AI
The blue line indicates where the profit target is placed (acting as a limit order).
The red line shows where the stop loss is placed (acting as a stop loss order).
The image above shows the profit target being hit for the short trade. Profitable trades are indicated by a blue arrow and blue line. Hover over the blue arrow to access more information about the trade exit.
Long Entry: Green Arrow
Short Entry: Red Arrow
Profitable Trades: Blue Arrow
Losing Trades: Red Arrow
IQMA
The IQMA implements a dynamic moving average that adapts to market conditions by adjusting its smoothing factor based on its own slope. This makes it more responsive in volatile conditions (steeper slopes) and smoother in less volatile conditions.
The IQMA is not used by Reversal IQ as a trade condition; however, the IQMA can be used by traders to characterize the overarching trend and elect to trade only long positions during bullish conditions and only short positions during bearish conditions.
The IQMA is an adaptive smoothing function that applies a combination of multiple moving averages to reduce lag and noise in the data. The adaptiveness is achieved by dynamically adjusting the Volatility Factor (VF) based on the slope (derivative) of the price trend, making it more responsive to strong trends and smoother in consolidating markets.
This process effectively makes the moving average a self-adjusting filter, the IQMA attempts to track both trending and ranging market conditions by dynamically changing its sensitivity in response to price movements.
When IQMA is blue, an overarching uptrend is in place. When IQMA is red, an overarching downtrend is in place.
IQ Candles
IQ Candles are price candles color-coordinated with IQMA. IQ Candles help visualize the overarching trend and are not used by Reversal IQ to determine trade entries and trade exits.
AI Aggressiveness
Reversal IQ has only one setting that controls its functionality.
AI Aggressiveness controls the aggressiveness of the AI. This setting has three options: Sniper, Aggressive, and Very Aggressive.
Sniper Mode
In Sniper Mode, Reversal IQ will prioritize trading large deviations from established reversal levels and extracting the largest countertrend move possible from them.
Aggressive Mode
In Aggressive Mode, Reversal IQ still prioritizes quality but allows for strong, quantity-based signals. More trades will be executed in this mode with tighter stops and profit targets. Aggressive mode forces Reversal IQ to learn from narrower raw-dollar violations of historical levels.
Very Aggressive Mode
In Very Aggressive Mode, Reversal IQ still prioritizes the strongest quantity-based signals. Stop and target distances aren't inherently affected, but entries will be aggressive while prioritizing performance. Very Aggressive mode forces Reversal IQ to learn from narrower raw-dollar violations of historical levels and also forces it to embrace volatility more aggressively.
AI Direction
The AI Direction setting controls the trade direction Reversal IQ is allowed to take.
“Both” allows for both long and short trades.
“Long” allows for only long trades.
“Short” allows for only short trades.
Verifying Reversal IQ’s Effectiveness
Reversal IQ automatically tracks its performance and displays the profit factor for the long strategy and the short strategy it uses. This information can be found in a table located in the top-right corner of your chart.
The image above shows the long strategy profit factor and the short strategy profit factor for Reversal IQ.
A profit factor greater than 1 indicates a strategy profitably traded historical price data.
A profit factor less than 1 indicates a strategy unprofitably traded historical price data.
A profit factor equal to 1 indicates a strategy did not lose or gain money when trading historical price data.
Using Reversal IQ
While Reversal IQ is a full-fledged trading system with entries and exits, it was designed for the manual trader to take its trading signals and analysis indications to greater heights - offering numerous applications beyond its built-in trading system.
The hallmark feature of Reversal IQ is its sniper-like reversal signals. While exits are dynamically calculated as well, Reversal IQ simply has a knack for "sniping" price reversals.
When performing live analysis, you can use the IQ Channel to evaluate price reversal areas, whether price has extended too far in one direction, and whether price is likely to reverse soon.
Of course, in times of exuberance or panic, price may push through the reversal levels. While infrequent, it can happen to any indicator.
The deeper price moves into the bullish reversal area (blue) the better chance that price has extended too far and will reverse to the upside soon. The deeper price moves into the bearish reversal area (red) the better chance that price has extended too far and will reverse to the downside soon.
Of course, you can set alerts for all Reversal IQ entry and exit signals, effectively following along its systematic conquest of price movement.
Fundamental AnalysisThis indicator compiles a wide range of essential financial metrics directly onto your chart, providing a quick and easy reference to the financial condition of any listed company. Instead of diving into lengthy financial reports, you get an at-a-glance overview of the most critical financial ratios and figures.
Key Metrics Included:
Interest Coverage Ratio: Helps assess a company’s ability to pay interest on its debt. Higher values suggest greater financial stability and lower default risk.
Gross Profit Margin: Shows how much profit a company makes after covering its production costs. A higher margin indicates better efficiency and profitability in managing costs.
Dividend Yield: Reflects the annual dividend payout as a percentage of the current stock price. A moderate dividend yield may indicate a balance between income generation and growth potential.
Enterprise Value (EV): A comprehensive measure of a company's total value, including debt. Useful for comparing companies with different capital structures.
Free Cash Flow to Equity (FCFE): Reveals how much cash is available to shareholders after accounting for capital expenditures and debt repayments, indicating the company’s ability to reward investors.
Price-to-Book Ratio (P/B): Compares a company's market value to its book value. Lower values might indicate undervaluation, while higher values can suggest overvaluation.
Price-to-Cash Flow Ratio (P/CF): Helps identify companies that generate a significant amount of cash relative to their price, a key metric for assessing liquidity and sustainability.
Price-to-Free Cash Flow Ratio: Shows how much investors are paying for the company's free cash flow, which is crucial for assessing value, especially in capital-intensive sectors.
Price Earnings Ratio (P/E): The classic metric for valuing a company based on its earnings. Useful for comparing valuations across companies and industries.
Debt-to-Equity Ratio: Indicates the proportion of company financing that comes from debt and equity. A lower ratio typically signifies a less risky investment.
Return on Equity (ROE): Measures how effectively a company uses equity capital to generate profit. A higher ROE can indicate a profitable, well-managed company.
Quick Ratio: Assesses a company’s short-term liquidity by comparing its liquid assets to its current liabilities. Higher values indicate better liquidity.
Operating Margin: Reflects the percentage of revenue left after covering operating expenses. Higher margins suggest greater operational efficiency.
How to Use This Indicator:
Use this indicator as part of your due diligence when analyzing potential investments. Each metric is color-coded to quickly highlight whether the value is within a favorable range, making it easy to identify strong or weak aspects of a company’s financial position.
Green indicates favorable metrics, suggesting financial strength or value.
Red highlights areas of concern, pointing to potential risks or weaknesses.
This tool can help you compare different companies, spot trends over time, and make more informed decisions based on solid financial analysis. Whether you’re a value investor looking for undervalued stocks, a dividend seeker searching for sustainable payouts, or a growth investor focused on profitability and efficiency, this indicator can be tailored to your strategy.
Uptrick: RSI Histogram
1. **Introduction to the RSI and Moving Averages**
2. **Detailed Breakdown of the Uptrick: RSI Histogram**
3. **Calculation and Formula**
4. **Visual Representation**
5. **Customization and User Settings**
6. **Trading Strategies and Applications**
7. **Risk Management**
8. **Case Studies and Examples**
9. **Comparison with Other Indicators**
10. **Advanced Usage and Tips**
---
## 1. Introduction to the RSI and Moving Averages
### **1.1 Relative Strength Index (RSI)**
The Relative Strength Index (RSI) is a momentum oscillator developed by J. Welles Wilder and introduced in his 1978 book "New Concepts in Technical Trading Systems." It is widely used in technical analysis to measure the speed and change of price movements.
**Purpose of RSI:**
- **Identify Overbought/Oversold Conditions:** RSI values range from 0 to 100. Traditionally, values above 70 are considered overbought, while values below 30 are considered oversold. These thresholds help traders identify potential reversal points in the market.
- **Trend Strength Measurement:** RSI also indicates the strength of a trend. High RSI values suggest strong bullish momentum, while low values indicate bearish momentum.
**Calculation of RSI:**
1. **Calculate the Average Gain and Loss:** Over a specified period (e.g., 14 days), calculate the average gain and loss.
2. **Compute the Relative Strength (RS):** RS is the ratio of average gain to average loss.
3. **RSI Formula:** RSI = 100 - (100 / (1 + RS))
### **1.2 Moving Averages (MA)**
Moving Averages are used to smooth out price data and identify trends by filtering out short-term fluctuations. Two common types are:
**Simple Moving Average (SMA):** The average of prices over a specified number of periods.
**Exponential Moving Average (EMA):** A type of moving average that gives more weight to recent prices, making it more responsive to recent price changes.
**Smoothed Moving Average (SMA):** Used to reduce the impact of volatility and provide a clearer view of the underlying trend. The RMA, or Running Moving Average, used in the USH script is similar to an EMA but based on the average of RSI values.
## 2. Detailed Breakdown of the Uptrick: RSI Histogram
### **2.1 Indicator Overview**
The Uptrick: RSI Histogram (USH) is a technical analysis tool that combines the RSI with a moving average to create a histogram that reflects momentum and trend strength.
**Key Components:**
- **RSI Calculation:** Determines the relative strength of price movements.
- **Moving Average Application:** Smooths the RSI values to provide a clearer trend indication.
- **Histogram Plotting:** Visualizes the deviation of the smoothed RSI from a neutral level.
### **2.2 Indicator Purpose**
The primary purpose of the USH is to provide a clear visual representation of the market's momentum and trend strength. It helps traders identify:
- **Bullish and Bearish Trends:** By showing how far the smoothed RSI is from the neutral 50 level.
- **Potential Reversal Points:** By highlighting changes in momentum.
### **2.3 Indicator Design**
**RSI Moving Average (RSI MA):** The RSI MA is a smoothed version of the RSI, calculated using a running moving average. This smooths out short-term fluctuations and provides a clearer indication of the underlying trend.
**Histogram Calculation:**
- **Neutral Level:** The histogram is plotted relative to the neutral level of 50. This level represents a balanced market where neither bulls nor bears have dominance.
- **Histogram Values:** The histogram bars show the difference between the RSI MA and the neutral level. Positive values indicate bullish momentum, while negative values indicate bearish momentum.
## 3. Calculation and Formula
### **3.1 RSI Calculation**
The RSI calculation involves:
1. **Average Gain and Loss:** Calculated over the specified length (e.g., 14 periods).
2. **Relative Strength (RS):** RS = Average Gain / Average Loss.
3. **RSI Formula:** RSI = 100 - (100 / (1 + RS)).
### **3.2 Moving Average Calculation**
For the USH indicator, the RSI is smoothed using a running moving average (RMA). The RMA formula is similar to that of the EMA but is based on averaging RSI values over the specified length.
### **3.3 Histogram Calculation**
The histogram value is calculated as:
- **Histogram Value = RSI MA - 50**
**Plotting the Histogram:**
- **Positive Histogram Values:** Indicate that the RSI MA is above the neutral level, suggesting bullish momentum.
- **Negative Histogram Values:** Indicate that the RSI MA is below the neutral level, suggesting bearish momentum.
## 4. Visual Representation
### **4.1 Histogram Bars**
The histogram is plotted as bars on the chart:
- **Bullish Bars:** Colored green when the RSI MA is above 50.
- **Bearish Bars:** Colored red when the RSI MA is below 50.
### **4.2 Customization Options**
Traders can customize:
- **RSI Length:** Adjust the length of the RSI calculation to match their trading style.
- **Bull and Bear Colors:** Choose colors for histogram bars to enhance visual clarity.
### **4.3 Interpretation**
**Bullish Signal:** A histogram bar that moves from red to green indicates a potential shift to a bullish trend.
**Bearish Signal:** A histogram bar that moves from green to red indicates a potential shift to a bearish trend.
## 5. Customization and User Settings
### **5.1 Adjusting RSI Length**
The length parameter determines the number of periods over which the RSI is calculated and smoothed. Shorter lengths make the RSI more sensitive to price changes, while longer lengths provide a smoother view of trends.
### **5.2 Color Settings**
Traders can adjust:
- **Bull Color:** Color of histogram bars indicating bullish momentum.
- **Bear Color:** Color of histogram bars indicating bearish momentum.
**Customization Benefits:**
- **Visual Clarity:** Traders can choose colors that stand out against their chart’s background.
- **Personal Preference:** Adjust settings to match individual trading styles and preferences.
## 6. Trading Strategies and Applications
### **6.1 Trend Following**
**Identifying Entry Points:**
- **Bullish Entry:** When the histogram changes from red to green, it signals a potential entry point for long positions.
- **Bearish Entry:** When the histogram changes from green to red, it signals a potential entry point for short positions.
**Trend Confirmation:** The histogram helps confirm the strength of a trend. Strong, consistent green bars indicate robust bullish momentum, while strong, consistent red bars indicate robust bearish momentum.
### **6.2 Swing Trading**
**Momentum Analysis:**
- **Entry Signals:** Look for significant shifts in the histogram to time entries. A shift from bearish to bullish (red to green) indicates potential for upward movement.
- **Exit Signals:** A shift from bullish to bearish (green to red) suggests a potential weakening of the trend, signaling an exit or reversal point.
### **6.3 Range Trading**
**Market Conditions:**
- **Consolidation:** The histogram close to zero suggests a range-bound market. Traders can use this information to identify support and resistance levels.
- **Breakout Potential:** A significant move away from the neutral level may indicate a potential breakout from the range.
### **6.4 Risk Management**
**Stop-Loss Placement:**
- **Bullish Positions:** Place stop-loss orders below recent support levels when the histogram is green.
- **Bearish Positions:** Place stop-loss orders above recent resistance levels when the histogram is red.
**Position Sizing:** Adjust position sizes based on the strength of the histogram signals. Strong trends (indicated by larger histogram bars) may warrant larger positions, while weaker signals suggest smaller positions.
## 7. Risk Management
### **7.1 Importance of Risk Management**
Effective risk management is crucial for long-term trading success. It involves protecting capital, managing losses, and optimizing trade setups.
### **7.2 Using USH for Risk Management**
**Stop-Loss and Take-Profit Levels:**
- **Stop-Loss Orders:** Use the histogram to set stop-loss levels based on trend strength. For instance, place stops below support levels in bullish trends and above resistance levels in bearish trends.
- **Take-Profit Targets:** Adjust take-profit levels based on histogram changes. For example, lock in profits as the histogram starts to shift from green to red.
**Position Sizing:**
- **Trend Strength:** Scale position sizes based on the strength of histogram signals. Larger histogram bars indicate stronger trends, which may justify larger positions.
- **Volatility:** Consider market volatility and adjust position sizes to mitigate risk.
## 8. Case Studies and Examples
### **8.1 Example 1: Bullish Trend**
**Scenario:** A trader notices a transition from red to green histogram bars.
**Analysis:**
- **Entry Point:** The transition indicates a potential bullish trend. The trader decides to enter a long position.
- **Stop-Loss:** Set stop-loss below recent support levels.
- **Take-Profit:** Consider taking profits as the histogram moves back towards zero or turns red.
**Outcome:** The bullish trend continues, and the histogram remains green, providing a profitable trade setup.
### **8.2 Example 2: Bearish Trend**
**Scenario:** A trader observes a transition from green to red histogram bars.
**Analysis:**
- **Entry Point:** The transition suggests a potential
bearish trend. The trader decides to enter a short position.
- **Stop-Loss:** Set stop-loss above recent resistance levels.
- **Take-Profit:** Consider taking profits as the histogram approaches zero or shifts to green.
**Outcome:** The bearish trend continues, and the histogram remains red, resulting in a successful trade.
## 9. Comparison with Other Indicators
### **9.1 RSI vs. USH**
**RSI:** Measures momentum and identifies overbought/oversold conditions.
**USH:** Builds on RSI by incorporating a moving average and histogram to provide a clearer view of trend strength and momentum.
### **9.2 RSI vs. MACD**
**MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence):** A trend-following momentum indicator that uses moving averages to identify changes in trend direction.
**Comparison:**
- **USH:** Provides a smoothed RSI perspective and visual histogram for trend strength.
- **MACD:** Offers signals based on the convergence and divergence of moving averages.
### **9.3 RSI vs. Stochastic Oscillator**
**Stochastic Oscillator:** Measures the level of the closing price relative to the high-low range over a specified period.
**Comparison:**
- **USH:** Focuses on smoothed RSI values and histogram representation.
- **Stochastic Oscillator:** Provides overbought/oversold signals and potential reversals based on price levels.
## 10. Advanced Usage and Tips
### **10.1 Combining Indicators**
**Multi-Indicator Strategies:** Combine the USH with other technical indicators (e.g., Moving Averages, Bollinger Bands) for a comprehensive trading strategy.
**Confirmation Signals:** Use the USH to confirm signals from other indicators. For instance, a bullish histogram combined with a moving average crossover may provide a stronger buy signal.
### **10.2 Customization Tips**
**Adjust RSI Length:** Experiment with different RSI lengths to match various market conditions and trading styles.
**Color Preferences:** Choose histogram colors that enhance visibility and align with personal preferences.
### **10.3 Continuous Learning**
**Backtesting:** Regularly backtest the USH with historical data to refine strategies and improve accuracy.
**Education:** Stay updated with trading education and adapt strategies based on market changes and personal experiences.
CPR By Ask Dinesh Kumar(ADK)Simple CPR Indicator to increase probability of profitable trades:
The Central Pivot Range (CPR) is a trading tool used by traders to identify potential support and resistance levels in the market. Here's a simplified explanation of how traders can potentially profit using the Central Pivot Range with 10 lines:
1. *Understanding CPR*: CPR consists of three lines: the pivot point (PP), upper resistance level (R1), and lower support level (S1). Additionally, traders often add five more of profitable tradeslines above and below the PP to create a 10-line CPR.
2. *Identify Trend*: Determine the prevailing market trend. If the market is bullish, traders will look for buying opportunities near support levels. If the market is bearish, they'll seek selling opportunities near resistance levels.
3. *Entry Points*: Look for entry points near the support (S1) or resistance (R1) levels within the CPR. These levels can act as potential turning points where price may reverse.
4. *Risk Management*: Set stop-loss orders to manage risk. Stop-loss orders should be placed slightly below support levels for long positions and slightly above resistance levels for short positions.
5. *Profit Targets*: Determine profit targets based on the distance between entry point and the next support or resistance level. Some traders use a risk-reward ratio to ensure potential profits outweigh potential losses.
6. *Confirmation*: Use additional technical indicators or price action patterns to confirm potential entry or exit points within the CPR.
7. *Monitor Price Action*: Continuously monitor price action around the CPR levels. Traders should be prepared to adjust their positions if price breaks through support or resistance levels convincingly.
8. *Trade Management*: Once in a trade, actively manage it by adjusting stop-loss orders, trailing stops, or taking partial profits as price moves in the desired direction.
9. *Market Conditions*: Consider broader market conditions, such as economic indicators, geopolitical events, or news releases, which can impact price movements and the effectiveness of CPR.
10. *Practice and Analysis*: Practice using CPR on historical price charts and analyze past trades to refine strategies and improve decision-making skills.
Remember, trading involves risks, and no strategy guarantees profits. It's essential to thoroughly understand the concepts behind CPR and practice disciplined risk management to increase the likelihood of successful trades.
How does central pivot range work:
Sure here's a concise explanation of how the Central Pivot Range (CPR) works in 10 points:
1. *Calculation*: CPR is calculated using the previous day's high (H), low (L), and close (C) prices.
2. *Pivot Point (PP)*: The central point of CPR is the average of the previous day's high, low, and close prices: PP = (H + L + C) / 3.
3. *Upper Resistance Levels (R1, R2, R3)*: These are potential price levels above the pivot point where resistance may occur. They are calculated by adding a multiple of the range (H - L) to the pivot point: R1 = (2 * PP) - L, R2 = PP + (H - L), R3 = PP + 2 * (H - L).
4. *Lower Support Levels (S1, S2, S3)*: These are potential price levels below the pivot point where support may occur. They are calculated similarly to resistance levels but subtracting multiples of the range from the pivot point: S1 = (2 * PP) - H, S2 = PP - (H - L), S3 = PP - 2 * (H - L).
5. *Trading Signals*: Traders use CPR to identify potential support and resistance levels where price may reverse or stall.
6. *Range Bound Markets*: In range-bound markets, traders may buy near support levels (S1, S2, S3) and sell near resistance levels (R1, R2, R3).
7. *Breakout Trading*: When price breaks through a CPR level convincingly, it may indicate a potential trend continuation or reversal, providing breakout trading opportunities.
8. *Volume and Momentum*: Traders often look for confirmation from volume and momentum indicators when price approaches CPR levels.
9. *Intraday Trading*: CPR can be applied to intraday timeframes as well, providing shorter-term traders with potential trading levels for the day.
10. *Dynamic Indicator*: CPR is dynamic and recalculates daily based on new price data, allowing traders to adapt their strategies to current market conditions.
Understanding how to interpret CPR levels and integrate them into a trading strategy can help traders identify potential entry and exit points in the market.
Buffett Quality Score [Financials]Evaluating Financial Companies with the Buffett Quality Score 'Financials'
The financial sector, with its unique regulatory environment and market dynamics, requires a tailored approach to financial evaluation. The Buffett Quality Score is meticulously designed to assess the financial robustness and quality of companies within this sector. By focusing on industry-specific financial metrics, this scoring system provides valuable insights for investors and analysts navigating the complexities of the financial industry.
Scoring Methodology
Each selected financial metric contributes a point to the overall score if the specified condition is met. The combined score is a summation of points across all criteria, providing a comprehensive assessment of financial health and quality.
Selected Financial Metrics and Criteria
1. Altman Z-Score > 2.0
Relevance: The Altman Z-Score evaluates bankruptcy risk based on profitability, leverage, liquidity, solvency, and activity. In the financial sector, where market stability and solvency are critical, a score above 2.0 signifies a lower risk of financial distress.
2. Debt to Equity Ratio < 2.0
Relevance: A lower Debt to Equity Ratio signifies prudent financial management and reduced reliance on debt financing. This is particularly important for financial companies, which need to manage leverage carefully to avoid excessive risk.
3. Interest Coverage > 3.0
Relevance: The Interest Coverage Ratio measures a company's ability to meet its interest obligations from operating earnings. A ratio above 3.0 indicates that the company can comfortably cover its interest expenses, reducing the risk of default.
4. Return on Equity (ROE) > 10.0%
Relevance: ROE indicates the company's ability to generate profits from shareholder equity. An ROE above 10.0% suggests efficient use of capital and strong returns for investors, which is a key performance indicator for financial companies.
5. Return on Assets (ROA) > 1.0%
Relevance: ROA measures the company's ability to generate earnings from its assets. In the financial sector, where asset management is crucial, an ROA above 1.0% indicates effective use of assets to generate profits.
6. Net Margin > 10.0%
Relevance: Net Margin measures overall profitability after all expenses. A margin above 10.0% demonstrates strong financial performance and the ability to convert revenue into profit effectively.
7. Revenue One-Year Growth > 5.0%
Relevance: Revenue growth reflects market demand and company expansion. In the financial sector, where growth can be driven by new products and services, revenue exceeding 5.0% indicates successful market penetration and business expansion.
8. EPS One-Year Growth > 5.0%
Relevance: EPS growth reflects the company's ability to increase earnings per share over the past year. For financial companies, growth exceeding 5.0% signals positive earnings momentum and potential market strength.
9. Price/Earnings Ratio (Forward) < 20.0
Relevance: The Forward P/E Ratio reflects investor sentiment and earnings expectations. A ratio below 20.0 suggests reasonable valuation relative to earnings projections, which is important for investors seeking value and growth opportunities in the financial sector.
10. Piotroski F-Score > 6.0
Relevance: The Piotroski F-Score assesses fundamental strength, emphasizing profitability, leverage, liquidity, and operating efficiency. For financial companies, a score above 6.0 indicates strong financial health and operational efficiency.
Interpreting the Buffett Quality Score
0-4 Points: Indicates potential weaknesses across multiple financial areas, warranting careful consideration and risk assessment.
5 Points: Suggests average performance based on sector-specific criteria, requiring further analysis to determine investment viability.
6-10 Points: Signifies strong financial health and quality, positioning the company favorably within the competitive financial industry.
Conclusion
The Buffett Quality Score offers a strategic framework for evaluating financial companies, emphasizing critical financial indicators tailored to industry dynamics. By leveraging these insights, stakeholders can make informed decisions and identify companies poised for sustainable growth and performance in the evolving financial landscape.
Disclaimer: The Buffett Quality Score serves as a tool for financial analysis and should not replace professional advice or comprehensive due diligence. Investors should conduct thorough research and consult with financial experts based on individual investment objectives.
Candlestick Patterns detection and backtester [TrendX_]INTRODUCTION:
The Candlestick Patterns detection and backtester is designed to empower traders by identifying and analyzing candlestick patterns. Leveraging the robust Pine Script's add-in “All Candlestick Patterns”, this indicator meticulously scans the market for candlestick formations, offering insights into potential market movements. With its backtesting capabilities, we evaluate historical data to present traders with performance metrics such as win rates, net profit, and profit factors for each pattern. This allows traders to make informed decisions based on empirical evidence. The customizable settings, including trend filters and exit conditions, provide a tailored experience, adapting to various trading styles and strategies.
CREDIT:
This indicator is powered by the Pinescript add-in, *All Candlestick Patterns*, which provides a comprehensive library of candlestick formations.
TABLE USAGE:
The indicator features a detailed usage table that presents backtested results of all candlestick patterns. This includes:
Win Rates: The percentage of trades that resulted in a profit.
Net Profit: The total profit after subtracting losses from gains.
Profit Factor: A measure of the indicator’s profitability (gross profit / gross loss).
Total Trades: The total number of trades taken for every candlestick pattern's appearance.
CHART CANDLESTICK USAGE:
The indicator integrates candlestick pattern detections directly into the chart, displaying:
Pattern Detections: Each detected pattern is marked on the chart.
Win Rates: The win rate of each pattern is shown in brackets next to the detection.
CHART SETTINGS:
Users can customize the indicator with a variety of trend filters and settings:
Trend Filters: Apply filters based on SMA50, SMA200, Supertrend, and RSI threshold to refine pattern detections.
Exit Condition: Set an exit condition based on the crossing of a simple moving average of customizable length.
Visibility: Choose to show or hide the candlestick patterns’ detections on the chart.
GKD-B Multi-Ticker Stepped Baseline [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-B Multi-Ticker Stepped Baseline is a Baseline module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
This version of the GKD-B Baseline is designed specifically to support traders who wish to conduct GKD-BT Multi-Ticker Backtests with multiple tickers. This functionality is exclusive to the GKD-BT Multi-Ticker Backtests.
Traders have the capability to apply a filter to the selected moving average, leveraging various volatility metrics to enhance trend identification. This feature is tailored for traders favoring a gradual and consistent approach, enabling them to discern more sustainable trends. The system permits filtering for both the input data and the moving average results, requiring price movements to exceed a specific threshold—defined as multiples of the volatility—before acknowledging a trend change. This mechanism effectively reduces false signals caused by market noise and lateral movements. A distinctive aspect of this tool is its ability to adjust both price and moving average data based on volatility indicators like VIX, EUVIX, BVIV, and EVIV, among others. Understanding the time frame over which a volatility index is measured is crucial; for instance, VIX is measured on an annual basis, whereas BVIV and EVIV are based on a 30-day period. To accurately convert these measurements to a daily scale, users must input the correct "days per year" value: 252 for VIX and 30 for BVIV and EVIV. Future updates will introduce additional functionality to extend analysis across various time frames, but currently, this feature is solely available for daily time frame analysis.
█ GKD-B Multi-Ticker Stepped Baseline includes 65+ different moving averages:
Adaptive Moving Average - AMA
ADXvma - Average Directional Volatility Moving Average
Ahrens Moving Average
Alexander Moving Average - ALXMA
Deviation Scaled Moving Average - DSMA
Donchian
Double Exponential Moving Average - DEMA
Double Smoothed Exponential Moving Average - DSEMA
Double Smoothed FEMA - DSFEMA
Double Smoothed Range Weighted EMA - DSRWEMA
Double Smoothed Wilders EMA - DSWEMA
Double Weighted Moving Average - DWMA
Ehlers Optimal Tracking Filter - EOTF
Exponential Moving Average - EMA
Fast Exponential Moving Average - FEMA
Fractal Adaptive Moving Average - FRAMA
Generalized DEMA - GDEMA
Generalized Double DEMA - GDDEMA
Hull Moving Average (Type 1) - HMA1
Hull Moving Average (Type 2) - HMA2
Hull Moving Average (Type 3) - HMA3
Hull Moving Average (Type 4) - HMA4
IE /2 - Early T3 by Tim Tilson
Integral of Linear Regression Slope - ILRS
Kaufman Adaptive Moving Average - KAMA
Laguerre Filter
Leader Exponential Moving Average
Linear Regression Value - LSMA ( Least Squares Moving Average )
Linear Weighted Moving Average - LWMA
McGinley Dynamic
McNicholl EMA
Non-Lag Moving Average
Ocean NMA Moving Average - ONMAMA
One More Moving Average - OMA
Parabolic Weighted Moving Average
Probability Density Function Moving Average - PDFMA
Quadratic Regression Moving Average - QRMA
Regularized EMA - REMA
Range Weighted EMA - RWEMA
Recursive Moving Trendline
Simple Decycler - SDEC
Simple Jurik Moving Average - SJMA
Simple Moving Average - SMA
Sine Weighted Moving Average
Smoothed LWMA - SLWMA
Smoothed Moving Average - SMMA
Smoother
Super Smoother
T3
Three-pole Ehlers Butterworth
Three-pole Ehlers Smoother
Triangular Moving Average - TMA
Triple Exponential Moving Average - TEMA
Two-pole Ehlers Butterworth
Two-pole Ehlers smoother
Variable Index Dynamic Average - VIDYA
Variable Moving Average - VMA
Volume Weighted EMA - VEMA
Volume Weighted Moving Average - VWMA
Zero-Lag DEMA - Zero Lag Exponential Moving Average
Zero-Lag Moving Average
Zero Lag TEMA - Zero Lag Triple Exponential Moving Average
Geometric Mean Moving Average
Coral
Tether Lines
Range Filter
Triangle Moving Average Generalized
Ultinate Smoother
Adaptive Moving Average - AMA
The Adaptive Moving Average (AMA) is a moving average that changes its sensitivity to price moves depending on the calculated volatility. It becomes more sensitive during periods when the price is moving smoothly in a certain direction and becomes less sensitive when the price is volatile.
ADXvma - Average Directional Volatility Moving Average
Linnsoft's ADXvma formula is a volatility-based moving average, with the volatility being determined by the value of the ADX indicator.
The ADXvma has the SMA in Chande's CMO replaced with an EMA , it then uses a few more layers of EMA smoothing before the "Volatility Index" is calculated.
A side effect is, those additional layers slow down the ADXvma when you compare it to Chande's Variable Index Dynamic Average VIDYA .
The ADXVMA provides support during uptrends and resistance during downtrends and will stay flat for longer, but will create some of the most accurate market signals when it decides to move.
Ahrens Moving Average
Richard D. Ahrens's Moving Average promises "Smoother Data" that isn't influenced by the occasional price spike. It works by using the Open and the Close in his formula so that the only time the Ahrens Moving Average will change is when the candlestick is either making new highs or new lows.
Alexander Moving Average - ALXMA
This Moving Average uses an elaborate smoothing formula and utilizes a 7 period Moving Average. It corresponds to fitting a second-order polynomial to seven consecutive observations. This moving average is rarely used in trading but is interesting as this Moving Average has been applied to diffusion indexes that tend to be very volatile.
Deviation Scaled Moving Average - DSMA
The Deviation-Scaled Moving Average is a data smoothing technique that acts like an exponential moving average with a dynamic smoothing coefficient. The smoothing coefficient is automatically updated based on the magnitude of price changes. In the Deviation-Scaled Moving Average, the standard deviation from the mean is chosen to be the measure of this magnitude. The resulting indicator provides substantial smoothing of the data even when price changes are small while quickly adapting to these changes.
Donchian
Donchian Channels are three lines generated by moving average calculations that comprise an indicator formed by upper and lower bands around a midrange or median band. The upper band marks the highest price of a security over N periods while the lower band marks the lowest price of a security over N periods.
Double Exponential Moving Average - DEMA
The Double Exponential Moving Average ( DEMA ) combines a smoothed EMA and a single EMA to provide a low-lag indicator. It's primary purpose is to reduce the amount of "lagging entry" opportunities, and like all Moving Averages, the DEMA confirms uptrends whenever price crosses on top of it and closes above it, and confirms downtrends when the price crosses under it and closes below it - but with significantly less lag.
Double Smoothed Exponential Moving Average - DSEMA
The Double Smoothed Exponential Moving Average is a lot less laggy compared to a traditional EMA . It's also considered a leading indicator compared to the EMA , and is best utilized whenever smoothness and speed of reaction to market changes are required.
Double Smoothed FEMA - DSFEMA
Same as the Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA), but uses a faster version of EMA for its calculation.
Double Smoothed Range Weighted EMA - DSRWEMA
Range weighted exponential moving average (EMA) is, unlike the "regular" range weighted average calculated in a different way. Even though the basis - the range weighting - is the same, the way how it is calculated is completely different. By definition this type of EMA is calculated as a ratio of EMA of price*weight / EMA of weight. And the results are very different and the two should be considered as completely different types of averages. The higher than EMA to price changes responsiveness when the ranges increase remains in this EMA too and in those cases this EMA is clearly leading the "regular" EMA. This version includes double smoothing.
Double Smoothed Wilders EMA - DSWEMA
Welles Wilder was frequently using one "special" case of EMA (Exponential Moving Average) that is due to that fact (that he used it) sometimes called Wilder's EMA. This version is adding double smoothing to Wilder's EMA in order to make it "faster" (it is more responsive to market prices than the original) and is still keeping very smooth values.
Double Weighted Moving Average - DWMA
Double weighted moving average is an LWMA (Linear Weighted Moving Average). Instead of doing one cycle for calculating the LWMA, the indicator is made to cycle the loop 2 times. That produces a smoother values than the original LWMA
Ehlers Optimal Tracking Filter - EOTF
The Elher's Optimum Tracking Filter quickly adjusts rapid shifts in the price and yet is relatively smooth when the price has a sideways action. The operation of this filter is similar to Kaufman’s Adaptive Moving
Average
Exponential Moving Average - EMA
The EMA places more significance on recent data points and moves closer to price than the SMA ( Simple Moving Average ). It reacts faster to volatility due to its emphasis on recent data and is known for its ability to give greater weight to recent and more relevant data. The EMA is therefore seen as an enhancement over the SMA .
Fast Exponential Moving Average - FEMA
An Exponential Moving Average with a short look-back period.
Fractal Adaptive Moving Average - FRAMA
The Fractal Adaptive Moving Average by John Ehlers is an intelligent adaptive Moving Average which takes the importance of price changes into account and follows price closely enough to display significant moves whilst remaining flat if price ranges. The FRAMA does this by dynamically adjusting the look-back period based on the market's fractal geometry.
Generalized DEMA - GDEMA
The double exponential moving average (DEMA), was developed by Patrick Mulloy in an attempt to reduce the amount of lag time found in traditional moving averages. It was first introduced in the February 1994 issue of the magazine Technical Analysis of Stocks & Commodities in Mulloy's article "Smoothing Data with Faster Moving Averages.". Instead of using fixed multiplication factor in the final DEMA formula, the generalized version allows you to change it. By varying the "volume factor" form 0 to 1 you apply different multiplications and thus producing DEMA with different "speed" - the higher the volume factor is the "faster" the DEMA will be (but also the slope of it will be less smooth). The volume factor is limited in the calculation to 1 since any volume factor that is larger than 1 is increasing the overshooting to the extent that some volume factors usage makes the indicator unusable.
Generalized Double DEMA - GDDEMA
The double exponential moving average (DEMA), was developed by Patrick Mulloy in an attempt to reduce the amount of lag time found in traditional moving averages. It was first introduced in the February 1994 issue of the magazine Technical Analysis of Stocks & Commodities in Mulloy's article "Smoothing Data with Faster Moving Averages''. This is an extension of the Generalized DEMA using Tim Tillsons (the inventor of T3) idea, and is using GDEMA of GDEMA for calculation (which is the "middle step" of T3 calculation). Since there are no versions showing that middle step, this version covers that too. The result is smoother than Generalized DEMA, but is less smooth than T3 - one has to do some experimenting in order to find the optimal way to use it, but in any case, since it is "faster" than the T3 (Tim Tillson T3) and still smooth, it looks like a good compromise between speed and smoothness.
Hull Moving Average (Type 1) - HMA1
Alan Hull's HMA makes use of weighted moving averages to prioritize recent values and greatly reduce lag whilst maintaining the smoothness of a traditional Moving Average. For this reason, it's seen as a well-suited Moving Average for identifying entry points. This version uses SMA for smoothing.
Hull Moving Average (Type 2) - HMA2
Alan Hull's HMA makes use of weighted moving averages to prioritize recent values and greatly reduce lag whilst maintaining the smoothness of a traditional Moving Average. For this reason, it's seen as a well-suited Moving Average for identifying entry points. This version uses EMA for smoothing.
Hull Moving Average (Type 3) - HMA3
Alan Hull's HMA makes use of weighted moving averages to prioritize recent values and greatly reduce lag whilst maintaining the smoothness of a traditional Moving Average. For this reason, it's seen as a well-suited Moving Average for identifying entry points. This version uses LWMA for smoothing.
Hull Moving Average (Type 4) - HMA4
Alan Hull's HMA makes use of weighted moving averages to prioritize recent values and greatly reduce lag whilst maintaining the smoothness of a traditional Moving Average. For this reason, it's seen as a well-suited Moving Average for identifying entry points. This version uses SMMA for smoothing.
IE /2 - Early T3 by Tim Tilson and T3 new
The T3 moving average is a type of technical indicator used in financial analysis to identify trends in price movements. It is similar to the Exponential Moving Average (EMA) and the Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA), but uses a different smoothing algorithm.
The T3 moving average is calculated using a series of exponential moving averages that are designed to filter out noise and smooth the data. The resulting smoothed data is then weighted with a non-linear function to produce a final output that is more responsive to changes in trend direction.
The T3 moving average can be customized by adjusting the length of the moving average, as well as the weighting function used to smooth the data. It is commonly used in conjunction with other technical indicators as part of a larger trading strategy.
Integral of Linear Regression Slope - ILRS
A Moving Average where the slope of a linear regression line is simply integrated as it is fitted in a moving window of length N (natural numbers in maths) across the data. The derivative of ILRS is the linear regression slope. ILRS is not the same as a SMA ( Simple Moving Average ) of length N, which is actually the midpoint of the linear regression line as it moves across the data.
Kaufman Adaptive Moving Average - KAMA
Developed by Perry Kaufman, Kaufman's Adaptive Moving Average (KAMA) is a moving average designed to account for market noise or volatility. KAMA will closely follow prices when the price swings are relatively small and the noise is low.
Laguerre Filter
The Laguerre Filter is a smoothing filter which is based on Laguerre polynomials. The filter requires the current price, three prior prices, a user defined factor called Alpha to fill its calculation.
Adjusting the Alpha coefficient is used to increase or decrease its lag and its smoothness.
Leader Exponential Moving Average
The Leader EMA was created by Giorgos E. Siligardos who created a Moving Average which was able to eliminate lag altogether whilst maintaining some smoothness. It was first described during his research paper "MACD Leader" where he applied this to the MACD to improve its signals and remove its lagging issue. This filter uses his leading MACD's "modified EMA" and can be used as a zero lag filter.
Linear Regression Value - LSMA ( Least Squares Moving Average )
LSMA as a Moving Average is based on plotting the end point of the linear regression line. It compares the current value to the prior value and a determination is made of a possible trend, eg. the linear regression line is pointing up or down.
Linear Weighted Moving Average - LWMA
LWMA reacts to price quicker than the SMA and EMA . Although it's similar to the Simple Moving Average , the difference is that a weight coefficient is multiplied to the price which means the most recent price has the highest weighting, and each prior price has progressively less weight. The weights drop in a linear fashion.
McGinley Dynamic
John McGinley created this Moving Average to track prices better than traditional Moving Averages. It does this by incorporating an automatic adjustment factor into its formula, which speeds (or slows) the indicator in trending, or ranging, markets.
McNicholl EMA
Dennis McNicholl developed this Moving Average to use as his center line for his "Better Bollinger Bands" indicator and was successful because it responded better to volatility changes over the standard SMA and managed to avoid common whipsaws.
Non-lag moving average
The Non Lag Moving average follows price closely and gives very quick signals as well as early signals of price change. As a standalone Moving Average, it should not be used on its own, but as an additional confluence tool for early signals.
Ocean NMA Moving Average - ONMAMA
Created by Jim Sloman, the NMA is a moving average that automatically adjusts to volatility without being programmed to do so. For more info, read his guide "Ocean Theory, an Introduction"
One More Moving Average (OMA)
The One More Moving Average (OMA) is a technical indicator that calculates a series of Jurik-style moving averages in order to reduce noise and provide smoother price data. It uses six exponential moving averages to generate the final value, with the length of the moving averages determined by an adaptive algorithm that adjusts to the current market conditions. The algorithm calculates the average period by comparing the signal to noise ratio and using this value to determine the length of the moving averages. The resulting values are used to generate the final value of the OMA, which can be used to identify trends and potential changes in trend direction.
Parabolic Weighted Moving Average
The Parabolic Weighted Moving Average is a variation of the Linear Weighted Moving Average . The Linear Weighted Moving Average calculates the average by assigning different weights to each element in its calculation. The Parabolic Weighted Moving Average is a variation that allows weights to be changed to form a parabolic curve. It is done simply by using the Power parameter of this indicator.
Probability Density Function Moving Average - PDFMA
Probability density function based MA is a sort of weighted moving average that uses probability density function to calculate the weights. By its nature it is similar to a lot of digital filters.
Quadratic Regression Moving Average - QRMA
A quadratic regression is the process of finding the equation of the parabola that best fits a set of data. This moving average is an obscure concept that was posted to Forex forums in around 2008.
Regularized EMA - REMA
The regularized exponential moving average (REMA) by Chris Satchwell is a variation on the EMA (see Exponential Moving Average) designed to be smoother but not introduce too much extra lag.
Range Weighted EMA - RWEMA
This indicator is a variation of the range weighted EMA. The variation comes from a possible need to make that indicator a bit less "noisy" when it comes to slope changes. The method used for calculating this variation is the method described by Lee Leibfarth in his article "Trading With An Adaptive Price Zone".
Recursive Moving Trendline
Dennis Meyers's Recursive Moving Trendline uses a recursive (repeated application of a rule) polynomial fit, a technique that uses a small number of past values estimations of price and today's price to predict tomorrow's price.
Simple Decycler - SDEC
The Ehlers Simple Decycler study is a virtually zero-lag technical indicator proposed by John F. Ehlers. The original idea behind this study (and several others created by John F. Ehlers) is that market data can be considered a continuum of cycle periods with different cycle amplitudes. Thus, trending periods can be considered segments of longer cycles, or, in other words, low-frequency segments. Applying the right filter might help identify these segments.
Simple Loxx Moving Average - SLMA
A three stage moving average combining an adaptive EMA, a Kalman Filter, and a Kauffman adaptive filter.
Simple Moving Average - SMA
The SMA calculates the average of a range of prices by adding recent prices and then dividing that figure by the number of time periods in the calculation average. It is the most basic Moving Average which is seen as a reliable tool for starting off with Moving Average studies. As reliable as it may be, the basic moving average will work better when it's enhanced into an EMA .
Sine Weighted Moving Average
The Sine Weighted Moving Average assigns the most weight at the middle of the data set. It does this by weighting from the first half of a Sine Wave Cycle and the most weighting is given to the data in the middle of that data set. The Sine WMA closely resembles the TMA (Triangular Moving Average).
Smoothed LWMA - SLWMA
A smoothed version of the LWMA
Smoothed Moving Average - SMMA
The Smoothed Moving Average is similar to the Simple Moving Average ( SMA ), but aims to reduce noise rather than reduce lag. SMMA takes all prices into account and uses a long lookback period. Due to this, it's seen as an accurate yet laggy Moving Average.
Smoother
The Smoother filter is a faster-reacting smoothing technique which generates considerably less lag than the SMMA ( Smoothed Moving Average ). It gives earlier signals but can also create false signals due to its earlier reactions. This filter is sometimes wrongly mistaken for the superior Jurik Smoothing algorithm.
Super Smoother
The Super Smoother filter uses John Ehlers’s “Super Smoother” which consists of a Two pole Butterworth filter combined with a 2-bar SMA ( Simple Moving Average ) that suppresses the 22050 Hz Nyquist frequency: A characteristic of a sampler, which converts a continuous function or signal into a discrete sequence.
Three-pole Ehlers Butterworth
The 3 pole Ehlers Butterworth (as well as the Two pole Butterworth) are both superior alternatives to the EMA and SMA . They aim at producing less lag whilst maintaining accuracy. The 2 pole filter will give you a better approximation for price, whereas the 3 pole filter has superior smoothing.
Three-pole Ehlers smoother
The 3 pole Ehlers smoother works almost as close to price as the above mentioned 3 Pole Ehlers Butterworth. It acts as a strong baseline for signals but removes some noise. Side by side, it hardly differs from the Three Pole Ehlers Butterworth but when examined closely, it has better overshoot reduction compared to the 3 pole Ehlers Butterworth.
Triangular Moving Average - TMA
The TMA is similar to the EMA but uses a different weighting scheme. Exponential and weighted Moving Averages will assign weight to the most recent price data. Simple moving averages will assign the weight equally across all the price data. With a TMA (Triangular Moving Average), it is double smoother (averaged twice) so the majority of the weight is assigned to the middle portion of the data.
Triple Exponential Moving Average - TEMA
The TEMA uses multiple EMA calculations as well as subtracting lag to create a tool which can be used for scalping pullbacks. As it follows price closely, its signals are considered very noisy and should only be used in extremely fast-paced trading conditions.
Two-pole Ehlers Butterworth
The 2 pole Ehlers Butterworth (as well as the three pole Butterworth mentioned above) is another filter that cuts out the noise and follows the price closely. The 2 pole is seen as a faster, leading filter over the 3 pole and follows price a bit more closely. Analysts will utilize both a 2 pole and a 3 pole Butterworth on the same chart using the same period, but having both on chart allows its crosses to be traded.
Two-pole Ehlers smoother
A smoother version of the Two pole Ehlers Butterworth. This filter is the faster version out of the 3 pole Ehlers Butterworth. It does a decent job at cutting out market noise whilst emphasizing a closer following to price over the 3 pole Ehlers .
Variable Index Dynamic Average - VIDYA
Variable Index Dynamic Average Technical Indicator ( VIDYA ) was developed by Tushar Chande. It is an original method of calculating the Exponential Moving Average ( EMA ) with the dynamically changing period of averaging.
Variable Moving Average - VMA
The Variable Moving Average (VMA) is a study that uses an Exponential Moving Average being able to automatically adjust its smoothing factor according to the market volatility.
Volume Weighted EMA - VEMA
An EMA that uses a volume and price weighted calculation instead of the standard price input.
Volume Weighted Moving Average - VWMA
A Volume Weighted Moving Average is a moving average where more weight is given to bars with heavy volume than with light volume. Thus the value of the moving average will be closer to where most trading actually happened than it otherwise would be without being volume weighted.
Zero-Lag DEMA - Zero Lag Double Exponential Moving Average
John Ehlers's Zero Lag DEMA's aim is to eliminate the inherent lag associated with all trend following indicators which average a price over time. Because this is a Double Exponential Moving Average with Zero Lag, it has a tendency to overshoot and create a lot of false signals for swing trading. It can however be used for quick scalping or as a secondary indicator for confluence.
Zero-Lag Moving Average
The Zero Lag Moving Average is described by its creator, John Ehlers , as a Moving Average with absolutely no delay. And it's for this reason that this filter will cause a lot of abrupt signals which will not be ideal for medium to long-term traders. This filter is designed to follow price as close as possible whilst de-lagging data instead of basing it on regular data. The way this is done is by attempting to remove the cumulative effect of the Moving Average.
Zero-Lag TEMA - Zero Lag Triple Exponential Moving Average
Just like the Zero Lag DEMA , this filter will give you the fastest signals out of all the Zero Lag Moving Averages. This is useful for scalping but dangerous for medium to long-term traders, especially during market Volatility and news events. Having no lag, this filter also has no smoothing in its signals and can cause some very bizarre behavior when applied to certain indicators.
█ Volatility Goldie Locks Zone
This volatility filter is the standard first pass filter that is used for all NNFX systems despite the additional volatility/volume filter used in step 5. For this filter, price must fall into a range of maximum and minimum values calculated using multiples of volatility. Unlike the standard NNFX systems, this version of volatility filtering is separated from the core Baseline and uses it's own moving average with Loxx's Exotic Source Types.
█ Volatility Types included
The GKD system utilizes volatility-based take profits and stop losses. Each take profit and stop loss is calculated as a multiple of volatility. You can change the values of the multipliers in the settings as well.
This module includes 17 types of volatility:
Close-to-Close
Parkinson
Garman-Klass
Rogers-Satchell
Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
Average True Range
True Range Double
Standard Deviation
Adaptive Deviation
Median Absolute Deviation
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Mean Absolute Deviation
Static Percent
Various volatility estimators and indicators that investors and traders can use to measure the dispersion or volatility of a financial instrument's price. Each estimator has its strengths and weaknesses, and the choice of estimator should depend on the specific needs and circumstances of the user.
Volatility Ticker Selection
Import volatility tickers like VIX, EUVIX, BVIV, and EVIV.
Close-to-Close
Close-to-Close volatility is a classic and widely used volatility measure, sometimes referred to as historical volatility.
Volatility is an indicator of the speed of a stock price change. A stock with high volatility is one where the price changes rapidly and with a larger amplitude. The more volatile a stock is, the riskier it is.
Close-to-close historical volatility is calculated using only a stock's closing prices. It is the simplest volatility estimator. However, in many cases, it is not precise enough. Stock prices could jump significantly during a trading session and return to the opening value at the end. That means that a considerable amount of price information is not taken into account by close-to-close volatility.
Despite its drawbacks, Close-to-Close volatility is still useful in cases where the instrument doesn't have intraday prices. For example, mutual funds calculate their net asset values daily or weekly, and thus their prices are not suitable for more sophisticated volatility estimators.
Parkinson
Parkinson volatility is a volatility measure that uses the stock’s high and low price of the day.
The main difference between regular volatility and Parkinson volatility is that the latter uses high and low prices for a day, rather than only the closing price. This is useful as close-to-close prices could show little difference while large price movements could have occurred during the day. Thus, Parkinson's volatility is considered more precise and requires less data for calculation than close-to-close volatility.
One drawback of this estimator is that it doesn't take into account price movements after the market closes. Hence, it systematically undervalues volatility. This drawback is addressed in the Garman-Klass volatility estimator.
Garman-Klass
Garman-Klass is a volatility estimator that incorporates open, low, high, and close prices of a security.
Garman-Klass volatility extends Parkinson's volatility by taking into account the opening and closing prices. As markets are most active during the opening and closing of a trading session, it makes volatility estimation more accurate.
Garman and Klass also assumed that the process of price change follows a continuous diffusion process (Geometric Brownian motion). However, this assumption has several drawbacks. The method is not robust for opening jumps in price and trend movements.
Despite its drawbacks, the Garman-Klass estimator is still more effective than the basic formula since it takes into account not only the price at the beginning and end of the time interval but also intraday price extremes.
Researchers Rogers and Satchell have proposed a more efficient method for assessing historical volatility that takes into account price trends. See Rogers-Satchell Volatility for more detail.
Rogers-Satchell
Rogers-Satchell is an estimator for measuring the volatility of securities with an average return not equal to zero.
Unlike Parkinson and Garman-Klass estimators, Rogers-Satchell incorporates a drift term (mean return not equal to zero). As a result, it provides better volatility estimation when the underlying is trending.
The main disadvantage of this method is that it does not take into account price movements between trading sessions. This leads to an underestimation of volatility since price jumps periodically occur in the market precisely at the moments between sessions.
A more comprehensive estimator that also considers the gaps between sessions was developed based on the Rogers-Satchel formula in the 2000s by Yang-Zhang. See Yang Zhang Volatility for more detail.
Yang-Zhang
Yang Zhang is a historical volatility estimator that handles both opening jumps and the drift and has a minimum estimation error.
Yang-Zhang volatility can be thought of as a combination of the overnight (close-to-open volatility) and a weighted average of the Rogers-Satchell volatility and the day’s open-to-close volatility. It is considered to be 14 times more efficient than the close-to-close estimator.
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang (GKYZ) volatility estimator incorporates the returns of open, high, low, and closing prices in its calculation.
GKYZ volatility estimator takes into account overnight jumps but not the trend, i.e., it assumes that the underlying asset follows a Geometric Brownian Motion (GBM) process with zero drift. Therefore, the GKYZ volatility estimator tends to overestimate the volatility when the drift is different from zero. However, for a GBM process, this estimator is eight times more efficient than the close-to-close volatility estimator.
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
The Exponentially Weighted Moving Average (EWMA) is a quantitative or statistical measure used to model or describe a time series. The EWMA is widely used in finance, with the main applications being technical analysis and volatility modeling.
The moving average is designed such that older observations are given lower weights. The weights decrease exponentially as the data point gets older – hence the name exponentially weighted.
The only decision a user of the EWMA must make is the parameter lambda. The parameter decides how important the current observation is in the calculation of the EWMA. The higher the value of lambda, the more closely the EWMA tracks the original time series.
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
This is the simplest calculation of volatility. It's the standard deviation of ln(close/close(1)).
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
This is calculated using a short- and long-run mean of variance multiplied by ?.
avg(var;M) + (1 ? ?) avg(var;N) = 2?var/(M+1-(M-1)L) + 2(1-?)var/(M+1-(M-1)L)
Solving for ? can be done by minimizing the mean squared error of estimation; that is, regressing L^-1var - avg(var; N) against avg(var; M) - avg(var; N) and using the resulting beta estimate as ?.
Average True Range
The average true range (ATR) is a technical analysis indicator, introduced by market technician J. Welles Wilder Jr. in his book New Concepts in Technical Trading Systems, that measures market volatility by decomposing the entire range of an asset price for that period.
The true range indicator is taken as the greatest of the following: current high less the current low; the absolute value of the current high less the previous close; and the absolute value of the current low less the previous close. The ATR is then a moving average, generally using 14 days, of the true ranges.
True Range Double
A special case of ATR that attempts to correct for volatility skew.
Standard Deviation
Standard deviation is a statistic that measures the dispersion of a dataset relative to its mean and is calculated as the square root of the variance. The standard deviation is calculated as the square root of variance by determining each data point's deviation relative to the mean. If the data points are further from the mean, there is a higher deviation within the data set; thus, the more spread out the data, the higher the standard deviation.
Adaptive Deviation
By definition, the Standard Deviation (STD, also represented by the Greek letter sigma ? or the Latin letter s) is a measure that is used to quantify the amount of variation or dispersion of a set of data values. In technical analysis, we usually use it to measure the level of current volatility.
Standard Deviation is based on Simple Moving Average calculation for mean value. This version of standard deviation uses the properties of EMA to calculate what can be called a new type of deviation, and since it is based on EMA, we can call it EMA deviation. Additionally, Perry Kaufman's efficiency ratio is used to make it adaptive (since all EMA type calculations are nearly perfect for adapting).
The difference when compared to the standard is significant--not just because of EMA usage, but the efficiency ratio makes it a "bit more logical" in very volatile market conditions.
Median Absolute Deviation
The median absolute deviation is a measure of statistical dispersion. Moreover, the MAD is a robust statistic, being more resilient to outliers in a data set than the standard deviation. In the standard deviation, the distances from the mean are squared, so large deviations are weighted more heavily, and thus outliers can heavily influence it. In the MAD, the deviations of a small number of outliers are irrelevant.
Because the MAD is a more robust estimator of scale than the sample variance or standard deviation, it works better with distributions without a mean or variance, such as the Cauchy distribution.
For this indicator, a manual recreation of the quantile function in Pine Script is used. This is so users have a full inside view into how this is calculated.
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Average True Range (ATR) is a widely used indicator for many occasions in technical analysis. It is calculated as the RMA of the true range. This version adds a "twist": it uses Perry Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio to calculate adaptive true range.
Mean Absolute Deviation
The mean absolute deviation (MAD) is a measure of variability that indicates the average distance between observations and their mean. MAD uses the original units of the data, which simplifies interpretation. Larger values signify that the data points spread out further from the average. Conversely, lower values correspond to data points bunching closer to it. The mean absolute deviation is also known as the mean deviation and average absolute deviation.
This definition of the mean absolute deviation sounds similar to the standard deviation (SD). While both measure variability, they have different calculations. In recent years, some proponents of MAD have suggested that it replace the SD as the primary measure because it is a simpler concept that better fits real life.
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
8. Metamorphosis - a technical indicator that produces a compound signal from the combination of other GKD indicators*
*(not part of the NNFX algorithm)
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, and the Average Directional Index (ADX).
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
What is an Metamorphosis indicator?
The concept of a metamorphosis indicator involves the integration of two or more GKD indicators to generate a compound signal. This is achieved by evaluating the accuracy of each indicator and selecting the signal from the indicator with the highest accuracy. As an illustration, let's consider a scenario where we calculate the accuracy of 10 indicators and choose the signal from the indicator that demonstrates the highest accuracy.
The resulting output from the metamorphosis indicator can then be utilized in a GKD-BT backtest by occupying a slot that aligns with the purpose of the metamorphosis indicator. The slot can be a GKD-B, GKD-C, or GKD-E slot, depending on the specific requirements and objectives of the indicator. This allows for seamless integration and utilization of the compound signal within the GKD-BT framework.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v2.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
6. GKD-M - Metamorphosis module (Metamorphosis, Number 8 in the NNFX algorithm, but not part of the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data to A backtest module wherein the various components of the GKD system are combined to create a trading signal.
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Multi-Ticker CC Backtest
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: Advance Trend Pressure as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: uf2018
Continuation: Coppock Curve
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Metamorphosis: Baseline Optimizer
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, GKD-M, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD system.
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation gives signal
2. Baseline agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Confirmation 2 agrees
6. Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Standard Entry
1a. GKD-C Confirmation gives signal
2a. Baseline agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Baseline agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline gives signal
2. Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Confirmation 2 agrees
6. Volatility/Volume agrees
7. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSBC Bars Back' prior
1-Candle Baseline Entry
1a. GKD-B Baseline gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5a. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSBC Bars Back' prior
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Baseline agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Volatility/Volume agrees
Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume gives signal
2. Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Confirmation 2 agrees
6. Baseline agrees
7. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
1-Candle Volatility/Volume Entry
1a. GKD-V Volatility/Volume gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5a. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSVVC Bars Back' prior
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Volatility/Volume agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Baseline agrees
Confirmation 2 Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 2 gives signal
2. Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Volatility/Volume agrees
6. Baseline agrees
7. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
1-Candle Confirmation 2 Entry
1a. GKD-C Confirmation 2 gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5a. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSC2C Bars Back' prior
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Confirmation 2 agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Volatility/Volume agrees
5b. Baseline agrees
PullBack Entry
1a. GKD-B Baseline gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle
1b. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
2b. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Volatility/Volume agrees
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, 1-Candle Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, 1-Candle Baseline Entry, Volatility/Volume Entry, 1-Candle Volatility/Volume Entry, Confirmation 2 Entry, 1-Candle Confirmation 2 Entry, or Pullback entry triggered previously
2. Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
4. Confirmation 1 agrees
5. Baseline agrees
6. Confirmation 2 agrees
Day/Week/Month Metrics (Zeiierman)█ Overview
The Day/Week/Month Metrics (Zeiierman) indicator is a powerful tool for traders looking to incorporate historical performance into their trading strategy. It computes statistical metrics related to the performance of a trading instrument on different time scales: daily, weekly, and monthly. Breaking down the performance into daily, weekly, and monthly metrics provides a granular view of the instrument's behavior.
The indicator requires the chart to be set on a daily timeframe.
█ Key Statistics
⚪ Day in month
The performance of financial markets can show variability across different days within a month. This phenomenon, often referred to as the "monthly effect" or "turn-of-the-month effect," suggests that certain days of the month, especially the first and last days, tend to exhibit higher than average returns in many stock markets around the world. This effect is attributed to various factors including payroll contributions, investment of monthly dividends, and psychological factors among traders and investors.
⚪ Edge
The Edge calculation identifies days within a month that consistently outperform the average monthly trading performance. It provides a statistical advantage by quantifying how often trading on these specific days yields better returns than the overall monthly average. This insight helps traders understand not just when returns might be higher, but also how reliable these patterns are over time. By focusing on days with a higher "Edge," traders can potentially increase their chances of success by aligning their strategies with historically more profitable days.
⚪ Month
Historically, the stock market has exhibited seasonal trends, with certain months showing distinct patterns of performance. One of the most well-documented patterns is the "Sell in May and go away" phenomenon, suggesting that the period from November to April has historically brought significantly stronger gains in many major stock indices compared to the period from May to October. This pattern highlights the potential impact of seasonal investor sentiment and activities on market performance.
⚪ Day in week
Various studies have identified the "day-of-the-week effect," where certain days of the week, particularly Monday and Friday, show different average returns compared to other weekdays. Historically, Mondays have been associated with lower or negative average returns in many markets, a phenomenon often linked to the settlement of trades from the previous week and negative news accumulation over the weekend. Fridays, on the other hand, might exhibit positive bias as investors adjust positions ahead of the weekend.
⚪ Week in month
The performance of markets can also vary within different weeks of the month, with some studies suggesting a "week of the month effect." Typically, the first and the last week of the month may show stronger performance compared to the middle weeks. This pattern can be influenced by factors such as the timing of economic reports, monthly investment flows, and options and futures expiration dates which tend to cluster around these periods, affecting investor behavior and market liquidity.
█ How It Works
⚪ Day in Month
For each day of the month (1-31), the script calculates the average percentage change between the opening and closing prices of a trading instrument. This metric helps identify which days have historically been more volatile or profitable.
It uses arrays to store the sum of percentage changes for each day and the total occurrences of each day to calculate the average percentage change.
⚪ Month
The script calculates the overall gain for each month (January-December) by comparing the closing price at the start of a month to the closing price at the end, expressed as a percentage. This metric offers insights into which months might offer better trading opportunities based on historical performance.
Monthly gains are tracked using arrays that store the sum of these gains for each month and the count of occurrences to calculate the average monthly gain.
⚪ Day in Week
Similar to the day in the month analysis, the script evaluates the average percentage change between the opening and closing prices for each day of the week (Monday-Sunday). This information can be used to assess which days of the week are typically more favorable for trading.
The script uses arrays to accumulate percentage changes and occurrences for each weekday, allowing for the calculation of average changes per day of the week.
⚪ Week in Month
The script assesses the performance of each week within a month, identifying the gain from the start to the end of each week, expressed as a percentage. This can help traders understand which weeks within a month may have historically presented better trading conditions.
It employs arrays to track the weekly gains and the number of weeks, using a counter to identify which week of the month it is (1-4), allowing for the calculation of average weekly gains.
█ How to Use
Traders can use this indicator to identify patterns or trends in the instrument's performance. For example, if a particular day of the week consistently shows a higher percentage of bullish closes, a trader might consider this in their strategy. Similarly, if certain months show stronger performance historically, this information could influence trading decisions.
Identifying High-Performance Days and Periods
Day in Month & Day in Week Analysis: By examining the average percentage change for each day of the month and week, traders can identify specific days that historically have shown higher volatility or profitability. This allows for targeted trading strategies, focusing on these high-performance days to maximize potential gains.
Month Analysis: Understanding which months have historically provided better returns enables traders to adjust their trading intensity or capital allocation in anticipation of seasonally stronger or weaker periods.
Week in Month Analysis: Identifying which weeks within a month have historically been more profitable can help traders plan their trades around these periods, potentially increasing their chances of success.
█ Settings
Enable or disable the types of statistics you want to display in the table.
Table Size: Users can select the size of the table displayed on the chart, ranging from "Tiny" to "Auto," which adjusts based on screen size.
Table Position: Users can choose the location of the table on the chart
-----------------
Disclaimer
The information contained in my Scripts/Indicators/Ideas/Algos/Systems does not constitute financial advice or a solicitation to buy or sell any securities of any type. I will not accept liability for any loss or damage, including without limitation any loss of profit, which may arise directly or indirectly from the use of or reliance on such information.
All investments involve risk, and the past performance of a security, industry, sector, market, financial product, trading strategy, backtest, or individual's trading does not guarantee future results or returns. Investors are fully responsible for any investment decisions they make. Such decisions should be based solely on an evaluation of their financial circumstances, investment objectives, risk tolerance, and liquidity needs.
My Scripts/Indicators/Ideas/Algos/Systems are only for educational purposes!
NY Open Breakout Strategy - High Liquidity & Favorable RRR Pine Description:
The NY Open Breakout Strategy is an advanced Pine Script indicator tailored for the TradingView platform. This strategy is specifically designed to exploit the high liquidity found during the New York session opening in the Forex market. Its primary goal is to provide traders with an opportunity to engage in positions with lower risk and higher potential profits, thereby ensuring an advantageous risk-to-reward ratio (RRR).
Core Objectives:
Leveraging High Liquidity: Capitalizes on the significant market movements at the New York session opening, known for its high liquidity, to identify strong breakout signals.
Achieving Favorable RRR: By setting strategic stop-loss and take-profit levels, the strategy aims for a higher RRR. This approach can lead to overall profitability, even if the win rate is lower than the loss rate.
Functionality:
Dynamic Breakout Identification: Uses the first 15-minute candle’s high and low after NY open as benchmarks for detecting potential breakouts.
Customizable Stop-Loss & Take-Profit: Provides options to configure stop-loss at the last swing or the previous candle’s close. The take-profit levels are determined based on a favorable risk-reward ratio.
Visual Session Indicators: Includes distinct background coloring and vertical lines to mark the New York session for easy visibility.
Methodology:
This strategy hinges on the premise that the opening of the New York session often triggers key price movements due to an influx of trading activity. By focusing on these moments, our indicator aims to capture strong trends and breakout patterns. The carefully calibrated stop-loss and take-profit settings ensure that each trade aims for a higher potential reward compared to the risk undertaken.
Unique Features:
Enhanced Risk Management: With adaptable risk-reward settings, traders can tailor their trading strategies to align with individual risk appetites.
Personalized User Experience: Offers a range of customizable settings for visual elements, allowing traders to adjust the look and feel of the indicator to their preferences.
Usage Guidelines:
Customize the indicator settings, including the stop-loss reference and risk-reward ratio, to match your trading style.
Watch for 'Buy Enter' and 'Sell Enter' signals during the New York session opening.
Utilize the displayed stop-loss and take-profit levels to effectively manage each trade.
This NY Open Breakout Strategy is ideal for traders who prioritize efficient risk management while aiming to capitalize on the high liquidity periods of the Forex market. The strategy is designed to be robust, providing a pathway to profitability even in scenarios where the number of losing trades surpasses winning ones, thanks to its emphasis on a high risk-to-reward ratio.
GKD-B Multi-Ticker Baseline [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-B Multi-Ticker Baseline is a Baseline module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
This is a special implementation of GKD-B Baseline that allows the trader to input multiple tickers to be passed onto a GKD-BT Multi-Ticker Backtest. This baseline can only be used with the GKD-BT Multi-Ticker Backtests.
GKD-B Multi-Ticker Baseline includes 64 different moving averages:
Adaptive Moving Average - AMA
ADXvma - Average Directional Volatility Moving Average
Ahrens Moving Average
Alexander Moving Average - ALXMA
Deviation Scaled Moving Average - DSMA
Donchian
Double Exponential Moving Average - DEMA
Double Smoothed Exponential Moving Average - DSEMA
Double Smoothed FEMA - DSFEMA
Double Smoothed Range Weighted EMA - DSRWEMA
Double Smoothed Wilders EMA - DSWEMA
Double Weighted Moving Average - DWMA
Ehlers Optimal Tracking Filter - EOTF
Exponential Moving Average - EMA
Fast Exponential Moving Average - FEMA
Fractal Adaptive Moving Average - FRAMA
Generalized DEMA - GDEMA
Generalized Double DEMA - GDDEMA
Hull Moving Average (Type 1) - HMA1
Hull Moving Average (Type 2) - HMA2
Hull Moving Average (Type 3) - HMA3
Hull Moving Average (Type 4) - HMA4
IE /2 - Early T3 by Tim Tilson
Integral of Linear Regression Slope - ILRS
Instantaneous Trendline
Kalman Filter
Kaufman Adaptive Moving Average - KAMA
Laguerre Filter
Leader Exponential Moving Average
Linear Regression Value - LSMA ( Least Squares Moving Average )
Linear Weighted Moving Average - LWMA
McGinley Dynamic
McNicholl EMA
Non-Lag Moving Average
Ocean NMA Moving Average - ONMAMA
One More Moving Average - OMA
Parabolic Weighted Moving Average
Probability Density Function Moving Average - PDFMA
Quadratic Regression Moving Average - QRMA
Regularized EMA - REMA
Range Weighted EMA - RWEMA
Recursive Moving Trendline
Simple Decycler - SDEC
Simple Jurik Moving Average - SJMA
Simple Moving Average - SMA
Sine Weighted Moving Average
Smoothed LWMA - SLWMA
Smoothed Moving Average - SMMA
Smoother
Super Smoother
T3
Three-pole Ehlers Butterworth
Three-pole Ehlers Smoother
Triangular Moving Average - TMA
Triple Exponential Moving Average - TEMA
Two-pole Ehlers Butterworth
Two-pole Ehlers smoother
Variable Index Dynamic Average - VIDYA
Variable Moving Average - VMA
Volume Weighted EMA - VEMA
Volume Weighted Moving Average - VWMA
Zero-Lag DEMA - Zero Lag Exponential Moving Average
Zero-Lag Moving Average
Zero Lag TEMA - Zero Lag Triple Exponential Moving Average
Adaptive Moving Average - AMA
The Adaptive Moving Average (AMA) is a moving average that changes its sensitivity to price moves depending on the calculated volatility. It becomes more sensitive during periods when the price is moving smoothly in a certain direction and becomes less sensitive when the price is volatile.
ADXvma - Average Directional Volatility Moving Average
Linnsoft's ADXvma formula is a volatility-based moving average, with the volatility being determined by the value of the ADX indicator.
The ADXvma has the SMA in Chande's CMO replaced with an EMA , it then uses a few more layers of EMA smoothing before the "Volatility Index" is calculated.
A side effect is, those additional layers slow down the ADXvma when you compare it to Chande's Variable Index Dynamic Average VIDYA .
The ADXVMA provides support during uptrends and resistance during downtrends and will stay flat for longer, but will create some of the most accurate market signals when it decides to move.
Ahrens Moving Average
Richard D. Ahrens's Moving Average promises "Smoother Data" that isn't influenced by the occasional price spike. It works by using the Open and the Close in his formula so that the only time the Ahrens Moving Average will change is when the candlestick is either making new highs or new lows.
Alexander Moving Average - ALXMA
This Moving Average uses an elaborate smoothing formula and utilizes a 7 period Moving Average. It corresponds to fitting a second-order polynomial to seven consecutive observations. This moving average is rarely used in trading but is interesting as this Moving Average has been applied to diffusion indexes that tend to be very volatile.
Deviation Scaled Moving Average - DSMA
The Deviation-Scaled Moving Average is a data smoothing technique that acts like an exponential moving average with a dynamic smoothing coefficient. The smoothing coefficient is automatically updated based on the magnitude of price changes. In the Deviation-Scaled Moving Average, the standard deviation from the mean is chosen to be the measure of this magnitude. The resulting indicator provides substantial smoothing of the data even when price changes are small while quickly adapting to these changes.
Donchian
Donchian Channels are three lines generated by moving average calculations that comprise an indicator formed by upper and lower bands around a midrange or median band. The upper band marks the highest price of a security over N periods while the lower band marks the lowest price of a security over N periods.
Double Exponential Moving Average - DEMA
The Double Exponential Moving Average ( DEMA ) combines a smoothed EMA and a single EMA to provide a low-lag indicator. It's primary purpose is to reduce the amount of "lagging entry" opportunities, and like all Moving Averages, the DEMA confirms uptrends whenever price crosses on top of it and closes above it, and confirms downtrends when the price crosses under it and closes below it - but with significantly less lag.
Double Smoothed Exponential Moving Average - DSEMA
The Double Smoothed Exponential Moving Average is a lot less laggy compared to a traditional EMA . It's also considered a leading indicator compared to the EMA , and is best utilized whenever smoothness and speed of reaction to market changes are required.
Double Smoothed FEMA - DSFEMA
Same as the Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA), but uses a faster version of EMA for its calculation.
Double Smoothed Range Weighted EMA - DSRWEMA
Range weighted exponential moving average (EMA) is, unlike the "regular" range weighted average calculated in a different way. Even though the basis - the range weighting - is the same, the way how it is calculated is completely different. By definition this type of EMA is calculated as a ratio of EMA of price*weight / EMA of weight. And the results are very different and the two should be considered as completely different types of averages. The higher than EMA to price changes responsiveness when the ranges increase remains in this EMA too and in those cases this EMA is clearly leading the "regular" EMA. This version includes double smoothing.
Double Smoothed Wilders EMA - DSWEMA
Welles Wilder was frequently using one "special" case of EMA (Exponential Moving Average) that is due to that fact (that he used it) sometimes called Wilder's EMA. This version is adding double smoothing to Wilder's EMA in order to make it "faster" (it is more responsive to market prices than the original) and is still keeping very smooth values.
Double Weighted Moving Average - DWMA
Double weighted moving average is an LWMA (Linear Weighted Moving Average). Instead of doing one cycle for calculating the LWMA, the indicator is made to cycle the loop 2 times. That produces a smoother values than the original LWMA
Ehlers Optimal Tracking Filter - EOTF
The Elher's Optimum Tracking Filter quickly adjusts rapid shifts in the price and yet is relatively smooth when the price has a sideways action. The operation of this filter is similar to Kaufman’s Adaptive Moving
Average
Exponential Moving Average - EMA
The EMA places more significance on recent data points and moves closer to price than the SMA ( Simple Moving Average ). It reacts faster to volatility due to its emphasis on recent data and is known for its ability to give greater weight to recent and more relevant data. The EMA is therefore seen as an enhancement over the SMA .
Fast Exponential Moving Average - FEMA
An Exponential Moving Average with a short look-back period.
Fractal Adaptive Moving Average - FRAMA
The Fractal Adaptive Moving Average by John Ehlers is an intelligent adaptive Moving Average which takes the importance of price changes into account and follows price closely enough to display significant moves whilst remaining flat if price ranges. The FRAMA does this by dynamically adjusting the look-back period based on the market's fractal geometry.
Generalized DEMA - GDEMA
The double exponential moving average (DEMA), was developed by Patrick Mulloy in an attempt to reduce the amount of lag time found in traditional moving averages. It was first introduced in the February 1994 issue of the magazine Technical Analysis of Stocks & Commodities in Mulloy's article "Smoothing Data with Faster Moving Averages.". Instead of using fixed multiplication factor in the final DEMA formula, the generalized version allows you to change it. By varying the "volume factor" form 0 to 1 you apply different multiplications and thus producing DEMA with different "speed" - the higher the volume factor is the "faster" the DEMA will be (but also the slope of it will be less smooth). The volume factor is limited in the calculation to 1 since any volume factor that is larger than 1 is increasing the overshooting to the extent that some volume factors usage makes the indicator unusable.
Generalized Double DEMA - GDDEMA
The double exponential moving average (DEMA), was developed by Patrick Mulloy in an attempt to reduce the amount of lag time found in traditional moving averages. It was first introduced in the February 1994 issue of the magazine Technical Analysis of Stocks & Commodities in Mulloy's article "Smoothing Data with Faster Moving Averages''. This is an extension of the Generalized DEMA using Tim Tillsons (the inventor of T3) idea, and is using GDEMA of GDEMA for calculation (which is the "middle step" of T3 calculation). Since there are no versions showing that middle step, this version covers that too. The result is smoother than Generalized DEMA, but is less smooth than T3 - one has to do some experimenting in order to find the optimal way to use it, but in any case, since it is "faster" than the T3 (Tim Tillson T3) and still smooth, it looks like a good compromise between speed and smoothness.
Hull Moving Average (Type 1) - HMA1
Alan Hull's HMA makes use of weighted moving averages to prioritize recent values and greatly reduce lag whilst maintaining the smoothness of a traditional Moving Average. For this reason, it's seen as a well-suited Moving Average for identifying entry points. This version uses SMA for smoothing.
Hull Moving Average (Type 2) - HMA2
Alan Hull's HMA makes use of weighted moving averages to prioritize recent values and greatly reduce lag whilst maintaining the smoothness of a traditional Moving Average. For this reason, it's seen as a well-suited Moving Average for identifying entry points. This version uses EMA for smoothing.
Hull Moving Average (Type 3) - HMA3
Alan Hull's HMA makes use of weighted moving averages to prioritize recent values and greatly reduce lag whilst maintaining the smoothness of a traditional Moving Average. For this reason, it's seen as a well-suited Moving Average for identifying entry points. This version uses LWMA for smoothing.
Hull Moving Average (Type 4) - HMA4
Alan Hull's HMA makes use of weighted moving averages to prioritize recent values and greatly reduce lag whilst maintaining the smoothness of a traditional Moving Average. For this reason, it's seen as a well-suited Moving Average for identifying entry points. This version uses SMMA for smoothing.
IE /2 - Early T3 by Tim Tilson and T3 new
The T3 moving average is a type of technical indicator used in financial analysis to identify trends in price movements. It is similar to the Exponential Moving Average (EMA) and the Double Exponential Moving Average (DEMA), but uses a different smoothing algorithm.
The T3 moving average is calculated using a series of exponential moving averages that are designed to filter out noise and smooth the data. The resulting smoothed data is then weighted with a non-linear function to produce a final output that is more responsive to changes in trend direction.
The T3 moving average can be customized by adjusting the length of the moving average, as well as the weighting function used to smooth the data. It is commonly used in conjunction with other technical indicators as part of a larger trading strategy.
Integral of Linear Regression Slope - ILRS
A Moving Average where the slope of a linear regression line is simply integrated as it is fitted in a moving window of length N (natural numbers in maths) across the data. The derivative of ILRS is the linear regression slope. ILRS is not the same as a SMA ( Simple Moving Average ) of length N, which is actually the midpoint of the linear regression line as it moves across the data.
Instantaneous Trendline
The Instantaneous Trendline is created by removing the dominant cycle component from the price information which makes this Moving Average suitable for medium to long-term trading.
Kalman Filter
Kalman filter is an algorithm that uses a series of measurements observed over time, containing statistical noise and other inaccuracies. This means that the filter was originally designed to work with noisy data. Also, it is able to work with incomplete data. Another advantage is that it is designed for and applied in dynamic systems; our price chart belongs to such systems. This version is true to the original design of the trade-ready Kalman Filter where velocity is the triggering mechanism.
Kalman Filter is a more accurate smoothing/prediction algorithm than the moving average because it is adaptive: it accounts for estimation errors and tries to adjust its predictions from the information it learned in the previous stage. Theoretically, Kalman Filter consists of measurement and transition components.
Kaufman Adaptive Moving Average - KAMA
Developed by Perry Kaufman, Kaufman's Adaptive Moving Average (KAMA) is a moving average designed to account for market noise or volatility. KAMA will closely follow prices when the price swings are relatively small and the noise is low.
Laguerre Filter
The Laguerre Filter is a smoothing filter which is based on Laguerre polynomials. The filter requires the current price, three prior prices, a user defined factor called Alpha to fill its calculation.
Adjusting the Alpha coefficient is used to increase or decrease its lag and its smoothness.
Leader Exponential Moving Average
The Leader EMA was created by Giorgos E. Siligardos who created a Moving Average which was able to eliminate lag altogether whilst maintaining some smoothness. It was first described during his research paper "MACD Leader" where he applied this to the MACD to improve its signals and remove its lagging issue. This filter uses his leading MACD's "modified EMA" and can be used as a zero lag filter.
Linear Regression Value - LSMA ( Least Squares Moving Average )
LSMA as a Moving Average is based on plotting the end point of the linear regression line. It compares the current value to the prior value and a determination is made of a possible trend, eg. the linear regression line is pointing up or down.
Linear Weighted Moving Average - LWMA
LWMA reacts to price quicker than the SMA and EMA . Although it's similar to the Simple Moving Average , the difference is that a weight coefficient is multiplied to the price which means the most recent price has the highest weighting, and each prior price has progressively less weight. The weights drop in a linear fashion.
McGinley Dynamic
John McGinley created this Moving Average to track prices better than traditional Moving Averages. It does this by incorporating an automatic adjustment factor into its formula, which speeds (or slows) the indicator in trending, or ranging, markets.
McNicholl EMA
Dennis McNicholl developed this Moving Average to use as his center line for his "Better Bollinger Bands" indicator and was successful because it responded better to volatility changes over the standard SMA and managed to avoid common whipsaws.
Non-lag moving average
The Non Lag Moving average follows price closely and gives very quick signals as well as early signals of price change. As a standalone Moving Average, it should not be used on its own, but as an additional confluence tool for early signals.
Ocean NMA Moving Average - ONMAMA
Created by Jim Sloman, the NMA is a moving average that automatically adjusts to volatility without being programmed to do so. For more info, read his guide "Ocean Theory, an Introduction"
One More Moving Average (OMA)
The One More Moving Average (OMA) is a technical indicator that calculates a series of Jurik-style moving averages in order to reduce noise and provide smoother price data. It uses six exponential moving averages to generate the final value, with the length of the moving averages determined by an adaptive algorithm that adjusts to the current market conditions. The algorithm calculates the average period by comparing the signal to noise ratio and using this value to determine the length of the moving averages. The resulting values are used to generate the final value of the OMA, which can be used to identify trends and potential changes in trend direction.
Parabolic Weighted Moving Average
The Parabolic Weighted Moving Average is a variation of the Linear Weighted Moving Average . The Linear Weighted Moving Average calculates the average by assigning different weights to each element in its calculation. The Parabolic Weighted Moving Average is a variation that allows weights to be changed to form a parabolic curve. It is done simply by using the Power parameter of this indicator.
Probability Density Function Moving Average - PDFMA
Probability density function based MA is a sort of weighted moving average that uses probability density function to calculate the weights. By its nature it is similar to a lot of digital filters.
Quadratic Regression Moving Average - QRMA
A quadratic regression is the process of finding the equation of the parabola that best fits a set of data. This moving average is an obscure concept that was posted to Forex forums in around 2008.
Regularized EMA - REMA
The regularized exponential moving average (REMA) by Chris Satchwell is a variation on the EMA (see Exponential Moving Average) designed to be smoother but not introduce too much extra lag.
Range Weighted EMA - RWEMA
This indicator is a variation of the range weighted EMA. The variation comes from a possible need to make that indicator a bit less "noisy" when it comes to slope changes. The method used for calculating this variation is the method described by Lee Leibfarth in his article "Trading With An Adaptive Price Zone".
Recursive Moving Trendline
Dennis Meyers's Recursive Moving Trendline uses a recursive (repeated application of a rule) polynomial fit, a technique that uses a small number of past values estimations of price and today's price to predict tomorrow's price.
Simple Decycler - SDEC
The Ehlers Simple Decycler study is a virtually zero-lag technical indicator proposed by John F. Ehlers. The original idea behind this study (and several others created by John F. Ehlers) is that market data can be considered a continuum of cycle periods with different cycle amplitudes. Thus, trending periods can be considered segments of longer cycles, or, in other words, low-frequency segments. Applying the right filter might help identify these segments.
Simple Loxx Moving Average - SLMA
A three stage moving average combining an adaptive EMA, a Kalman Filter, and a Kauffman adaptive filter.
Simple Moving Average - SMA
The SMA calculates the average of a range of prices by adding recent prices and then dividing that figure by the number of time periods in the calculation average. It is the most basic Moving Average which is seen as a reliable tool for starting off with Moving Average studies. As reliable as it may be, the basic moving average will work better when it's enhanced into an EMA .
Sine Weighted Moving Average
The Sine Weighted Moving Average assigns the most weight at the middle of the data set. It does this by weighting from the first half of a Sine Wave Cycle and the most weighting is given to the data in the middle of that data set. The Sine WMA closely resembles the TMA (Triangular Moving Average).
Smoothed LWMA - SLWMA
A smoothed version of the LWMA
Smoothed Moving Average - SMMA
The Smoothed Moving Average is similar to the Simple Moving Average ( SMA ), but aims to reduce noise rather than reduce lag. SMMA takes all prices into account and uses a long lookback period. Due to this, it's seen as an accurate yet laggy Moving Average.
Smoother
The Smoother filter is a faster-reacting smoothing technique which generates considerably less lag than the SMMA ( Smoothed Moving Average ). It gives earlier signals but can also create false signals due to its earlier reactions. This filter is sometimes wrongly mistaken for the superior Jurik Smoothing algorithm.
Super Smoother
The Super Smoother filter uses John Ehlers’s “Super Smoother” which consists of a Two pole Butterworth filter combined with a 2-bar SMA ( Simple Moving Average ) that suppresses the 22050 Hz Nyquist frequency: A characteristic of a sampler, which converts a continuous function or signal into a discrete sequence.
Three-pole Ehlers Butterworth
The 3 pole Ehlers Butterworth (as well as the Two pole Butterworth) are both superior alternatives to the EMA and SMA . They aim at producing less lag whilst maintaining accuracy. The 2 pole filter will give you a better approximation for price, whereas the 3 pole filter has superior smoothing.
Three-pole Ehlers smoother
The 3 pole Ehlers smoother works almost as close to price as the above mentioned 3 Pole Ehlers Butterworth. It acts as a strong baseline for signals but removes some noise. Side by side, it hardly differs from the Three Pole Ehlers Butterworth but when examined closely, it has better overshoot reduction compared to the 3 pole Ehlers Butterworth.
Triangular Moving Average - TMA
The TMA is similar to the EMA but uses a different weighting scheme. Exponential and weighted Moving Averages will assign weight to the most recent price data. Simple moving averages will assign the weight equally across all the price data. With a TMA (Triangular Moving Average), it is double smoother (averaged twice) so the majority of the weight is assigned to the middle portion of the data.
Triple Exponential Moving Average - TEMA
The TEMA uses multiple EMA calculations as well as subtracting lag to create a tool which can be used for scalping pullbacks. As it follows price closely, its signals are considered very noisy and should only be used in extremely fast-paced trading conditions.
Two-pole Ehlers Butterworth
The 2 pole Ehlers Butterworth (as well as the three pole Butterworth mentioned above) is another filter that cuts out the noise and follows the price closely. The 2 pole is seen as a faster, leading filter over the 3 pole and follows price a bit more closely. Analysts will utilize both a 2 pole and a 3 pole Butterworth on the same chart using the same period, but having both on chart allows its crosses to be traded.
Two-pole Ehlers smoother
A smoother version of the Two pole Ehlers Butterworth. This filter is the faster version out of the 3 pole Ehlers Butterworth. It does a decent job at cutting out market noise whilst emphasizing a closer following to price over the 3 pole Ehlers .
Variable Index Dynamic Average - VIDYA
Variable Index Dynamic Average Technical Indicator ( VIDYA ) was developed by Tushar Chande. It is an original method of calculating the Exponential Moving Average ( EMA ) with the dynamically changing period of averaging.
Variable Moving Average - VMA
The Variable Moving Average (VMA) is a study that uses an Exponential Moving Average being able to automatically adjust its smoothing factor according to the market volatility.
Volume Weighted EMA - VEMA
An EMA that uses a volume and price weighted calculation instead of the standard price input.
Volume Weighted Moving Average - VWMA
A Volume Weighted Moving Average is a moving average where more weight is given to bars with heavy volume than with light volume. Thus the value of the moving average will be closer to where most trading actually happened than it otherwise would be without being volume weighted.
Zero-Lag DEMA - Zero Lag Double Exponential Moving Average
John Ehlers's Zero Lag DEMA's aim is to eliminate the inherent lag associated with all trend following indicators which average a price over time. Because this is a Double Exponential Moving Average with Zero Lag, it has a tendency to overshoot and create a lot of false signals for swing trading. It can however be used for quick scalping or as a secondary indicator for confluence.
Zero-Lag Moving Average
The Zero Lag Moving Average is described by its creator, John Ehlers , as a Moving Average with absolutely no delay. And it's for this reason that this filter will cause a lot of abrupt signals which will not be ideal for medium to long-term traders. This filter is designed to follow price as close as possible whilst de-lagging data instead of basing it on regular data. The way this is done is by attempting to remove the cumulative effect of the Moving Average.
Zero-Lag TEMA - Zero Lag Triple Exponential Moving Average
Just like the Zero Lag DEMA , this filter will give you the fastest signals out of all the Zero Lag Moving Averages. This is useful for scalping but dangerous for medium to long-term traders, especially during market Volatility and news events. Having no lag, this filter also has no smoothing in its signals and can cause some very bizarre behavior when applied to certain indicators.
█ Volatility Goldie Locks Zone
This volatility filter is the standard first pass filter that is used for all NNFX systems despite the additional volatility/volume filter used in step 5. For this filter, price must fall into a range of maximum and minimum values calculated using multiples of volatility. Unlike the standard NNFX systems, this version of volatility filtering is separated from the core Baseline and uses it's own moving average with Loxx's Exotic Source Types.
█ Volatility Types included
The GKD system utilizes volatility-based take profits and stop losses. Each take profit and stop loss is calculated as a multiple of volatility. You can change the values of the multipliers in the settings as well.
This module includes 17 types of volatility:
Close-to-Close
Parkinson
Garman-Klass
Rogers-Satchell
Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
Average True Range
True Range Double
Standard Deviation
Adaptive Deviation
Median Absolute Deviation
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Mean Absolute Deviation
Static Percent
Various volatility estimators and indicators that investors and traders can use to measure the dispersion or volatility of a financial instrument's price. Each estimator has its strengths and weaknesses, and the choice of estimator should depend on the specific needs and circumstances of the user.
Close-to-Close
Close-to-Close volatility is a classic and widely used volatility measure, sometimes referred to as historical volatility.
Volatility is an indicator of the speed of a stock price change. A stock with high volatility is one where the price changes rapidly and with a larger amplitude. The more volatile a stock is, the riskier it is.
Close-to-close historical volatility is calculated using only a stock's closing prices. It is the simplest volatility estimator. However, in many cases, it is not precise enough. Stock prices could jump significantly during a trading session and return to the opening value at the end. That means that a considerable amount of price information is not taken into account by close-to-close volatility.
Despite its drawbacks, Close-to-Close volatility is still useful in cases where the instrument doesn't have intraday prices. For example, mutual funds calculate their net asset values daily or weekly, and thus their prices are not suitable for more sophisticated volatility estimators.
Parkinson
Parkinson volatility is a volatility measure that uses the stock’s high and low price of the day.
The main difference between regular volatility and Parkinson volatility is that the latter uses high and low prices for a day, rather than only the closing price. This is useful as close-to-close prices could show little difference while large price movements could have occurred during the day. Thus, Parkinson's volatility is considered more precise and requires less data for calculation than close-to-close volatility.
One drawback of this estimator is that it doesn't take into account price movements after the market closes. Hence, it systematically undervalues volatility. This drawback is addressed in the Garman-Klass volatility estimator.
Garman-Klass
Garman-Klass is a volatility estimator that incorporates open, low, high, and close prices of a security.
Garman-Klass volatility extends Parkinson's volatility by taking into account the opening and closing prices. As markets are most active during the opening and closing of a trading session, it makes volatility estimation more accurate.
Garman and Klass also assumed that the process of price change follows a continuous diffusion process (Geometric Brownian motion). However, this assumption has several drawbacks. The method is not robust for opening jumps in price and trend movements.
Despite its drawbacks, the Garman-Klass estimator is still more effective than the basic formula since it takes into account not only the price at the beginning and end of the time interval but also intraday price extremes.
Researchers Rogers and Satchell have proposed a more efficient method for assessing historical volatility that takes into account price trends. See Rogers-Satchell Volatility for more detail.
Rogers-Satchell
Rogers-Satchell is an estimator for measuring the volatility of securities with an average return not equal to zero.
Unlike Parkinson and Garman-Klass estimators, Rogers-Satchell incorporates a drift term (mean return not equal to zero). As a result, it provides better volatility estimation when the underlying is trending.
The main disadvantage of this method is that it does not take into account price movements between trading sessions. This leads to an underestimation of volatility since price jumps periodically occur in the market precisely at the moments between sessions.
A more comprehensive estimator that also considers the gaps between sessions was developed based on the Rogers-Satchel formula in the 2000s by Yang-Zhang. See Yang Zhang Volatility for more detail.
Yang-Zhang
Yang Zhang is a historical volatility estimator that handles both opening jumps and the drift and has a minimum estimation error.
Yang-Zhang volatility can be thought of as a combination of the overnight (close-to-open volatility) and a weighted average of the Rogers-Satchell volatility and the day’s open-to-close volatility. It is considered to be 14 times more efficient than the close-to-close estimator.
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang (GKYZ) volatility estimator incorporates the returns of open, high, low, and closing prices in its calculation.
GKYZ volatility estimator takes into account overnight jumps but not the trend, i.e., it assumes that the underlying asset follows a Geometric Brownian Motion (GBM) process with zero drift. Therefore, the GKYZ volatility estimator tends to overestimate the volatility when the drift is different from zero. However, for a GBM process, this estimator is eight times more efficient than the close-to-close volatility estimator.
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
The Exponentially Weighted Moving Average (EWMA) is a quantitative or statistical measure used to model or describe a time series. The EWMA is widely used in finance, with the main applications being technical analysis and volatility modeling.
The moving average is designed such that older observations are given lower weights. The weights decrease exponentially as the data point gets older – hence the name exponentially weighted.
The only decision a user of the EWMA must make is the parameter lambda. The parameter decides how important the current observation is in the calculation of the EWMA. The higher the value of lambda, the more closely the EWMA tracks the original time series.
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
This is the simplest calculation of volatility. It's the standard deviation of ln(close/close(1)).
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
This is calculated using a short- and long-run mean of variance multiplied by ?.
?avg(var;M) + (1 ? ?) avg(var;N) = 2?var/(M+1-(M-1)L) + 2(1-?)var/(M+1-(M-1)L)
Solving for ? can be done by minimizing the mean squared error of estimation; that is, regressing L^-1var - avg(var; N) against avg(var; M) - avg(var; N) and using the resulting beta estimate as ?.
Average True Range
The average true range (ATR) is a technical analysis indicator, introduced by market technician J. Welles Wilder Jr. in his book New Concepts in Technical Trading Systems, that measures market volatility by decomposing the entire range of an asset price for that period.
The true range indicator is taken as the greatest of the following: current high less the current low; the absolute value of the current high less the previous close; and the absolute value of the current low less the previous close. The ATR is then a moving average, generally using 14 days, of the true ranges.
True Range Double
A special case of ATR that attempts to correct for volatility skew.
Standard Deviation
Standard deviation is a statistic that measures the dispersion of a dataset relative to its mean and is calculated as the square root of the variance. The standard deviation is calculated as the square root of variance by determining each data point's deviation relative to the mean. If the data points are further from the mean, there is a higher deviation within the data set; thus, the more spread out the data, the higher the standard deviation.
Adaptive Deviation
By definition, the Standard Deviation (STD, also represented by the Greek letter sigma ? or the Latin letter s) is a measure that is used to quantify the amount of variation or dispersion of a set of data values. In technical analysis, we usually use it to measure the level of current volatility.
Standard Deviation is based on Simple Moving Average calculation for mean value. This version of standard deviation uses the properties of EMA to calculate what can be called a new type of deviation, and since it is based on EMA, we can call it EMA deviation. Additionally, Perry Kaufman's efficiency ratio is used to make it adaptive (since all EMA type calculations are nearly perfect for adapting).
The difference when compared to the standard is significant--not just because of EMA usage, but the efficiency ratio makes it a "bit more logical" in very volatile market conditions.
Median Absolute Deviation
The median absolute deviation is a measure of statistical dispersion. Moreover, the MAD is a robust statistic, being more resilient to outliers in a data set than the standard deviation. In the standard deviation, the distances from the mean are squared, so large deviations are weighted more heavily, and thus outliers can heavily influence it. In the MAD, the deviations of a small number of outliers are irrelevant.
Because the MAD is a more robust estimator of scale than the sample variance or standard deviation, it works better with distributions without a mean or variance, such as the Cauchy distribution.
For this indicator, a manual recreation of the quantile function in Pine Script is used. This is so users have a full inside view into how this is calculated.
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Average True Range (ATR) is a widely used indicator for many occasions in technical analysis. It is calculated as the RMA of the true range. This version adds a "twist": it uses Perry Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio to calculate adaptive true range.
Mean Absolute Deviation
The mean absolute deviation (MAD) is a measure of variability that indicates the average distance between observations and their mean. MAD uses the original units of the data, which simplifies interpretation. Larger values signify that the data points spread out further from the average. Conversely, lower values correspond to data points bunching closer to it. The mean absolute deviation is also known as the mean deviation and average absolute deviation.
This definition of the mean absolute deviation sounds similar to the standard deviation (SD). While both measure variability, they have different calculations. In recent years, some proponents of MAD have suggested that it replace the SD as the primary measure because it is a simpler concept that better fits real life.
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
8. Metamorphosis - a technical indicator that produces a compound signal from the combination of other GKD indicators*
*(not part of the NNFX algorithm)
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
What is an Metamorphosis indicator?
The concept of a metamorphosis indicator involves the integration of two or more GKD indicators to generate a compound signal. This is achieved by evaluating the accuracy of each indicator and selecting the signal from the indicator with the highest accuracy. As an illustration, let's consider a scenario where we calculate the accuracy of 10 indicators and choose the signal from the indicator that demonstrates the highest accuracy.
The resulting output from the metamorphosis indicator can then be utilized in a GKD-BT backtest by occupying a slot that aligns with the purpose of the metamorphosis indicator. The slot can be a GKD-B, GKD-C, or GKD-E slot, depending on the specific requirements and objectives of the indicator. This allows for seamless integration and utilization of the compound signal within the GKD-BT framework.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v2.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
6. GKD-M - Metamorphosis module (Metamorphosis, Number 8 in the NNFX algorithm, but not part of the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data to A backtest module wherein the various components of the GKD system are combined to create a trading signal.
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Multi-Ticker SCC Backtest
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: Fisher Trasnform
Confirmation 2: uf2018
Continuation: Vortex
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Metamorphosis: Baseline Optimizer
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, GKD-M, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD system.
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation gives signal
2. Baseline agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Confirmation 2 agrees
6. Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Standard Entry
1a. GKD-C Confirmation gives signal
2a. Baseline agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Baseline agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Basline gives signal
2. Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Confirmation 2 agrees
6. Volatility/Volume agrees
7. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSBC Bars Back' prior
1-Candle Baseline Entry
1a. GKD-B Baseline gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5a. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSBC Bars Back' prior
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Baseline agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Volatility/Volume agrees
Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume gives signal
2. Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Confirmation 2 agrees
6. Baseline agrees
7. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
1-Candle Volatility/Volume Entry
1a. GKD-V Volatility/Volume gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5a. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSVVC Bars Back' prior
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Volatility/Volume agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Baseline agrees
Confirmation 2 Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 2 gives signal
2. Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Volatility/Volume agrees
6. Baseline agrees
7. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
1-Candle Confirmation 2 Entry
1a. GKD-C Confirmation 2 gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5a. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSC2C Bars Back' prior
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Confirmation 2 agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Volatility/Volume agrees
5b. Baseline agrees
PullBack Entry
1a. GKD-B Baseline gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle
1b. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
2b. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Volatility/Volume agrees
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, 1-Candle Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, 1-Candle Baseline Entry, Volatility/Volume Entry, 1-Candle Volatility/Volume Entry, Confirmation 2 Entry, 1-Candle Confirmation 2 Entry, or Pullback entry triggered previously
2. Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
4. Confirmation 1 agrees
5. Baseline agrees
6. Confirmation 2 agrees
█ Connecting to Backtests
All GKD indicators are chained indicators meaning you export the value of the indicators to specialized backtest to creat your GKD trading system. Each indicator contains a proprietary signal generation algo that will only work with GKD backtests. You can find these backtests using the links below.
GKD-BT Giga Confirmation Stack Backtest
GKD-BT Giga Stacks Backtest
GKD-BT Full Giga Kaleidoscope Backtest
GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Super Complex Backtest
GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Complex Backtest
GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Simple Backtest
GKD-M Baseline Optimizer
GKD-M Accuracy Alchemist
Z Algo (Expo)█ Overview
Z Algo (Expo) is a sophisticated and user-friendly trading tool designed to meet the needs of both novice and seasoned traders. With its real-time signals, trend analysis, and risk management capabilities, this tool can be a valuable addition to any trader's toolkit.
█ Main Features & How to Use
Buy/Sell signals: Z Algo provides real-time buy and sell signals, which assist traders in identifying the most opportune moments to enter or exit a trade.
Strong Buy/Sell signals: In addition to regular buy and sell signals, the tool also offers strong buy and sell signals. These are generated when the market conditions align with a higher probability of a significant price movement.
Sniper Signals: This feature is specifically designed for contrarian traders who look to exploit temporary market inefficiencies or take advantage of price reversals. When enabled, Sniper Signals identify potential market turning points, offering traders the opportunity to profit from sharp price fluctuations.
Reversal Cloud: The Reversal Cloud is a unique visual representation of the market's potential trend reversals. It offers traders an easy-to-understand display of changing market dynamics, enabling them to quickly identify potential entry and exit points based on trend reversals.
Support and Resistance (S/R) Levels: Z Algo automatically calculates and displays support and resistance levels on the chart. These are crucial price points where buying or selling pressure may change, providing valuable insights for traders looking to enter or exit positions based on these levels.
Trend Tracker: This feature helps traders monitor and analyze the prevailing market trend. Trend Tracker identifies and highlights the direction of the trend, allowing traders to align their strategies accordingly and increase their chances of success.
Trend Background Color: To improve the user experience and simplify the interpretation of market data, Z Algo changes the chart's background color based on the identified trend direction. This visual cue makes it easier for traders to recognize bullish or bearish trends at a glance.
Bar Coloring: In addition to the trend background color, Z Algo also provides bar coloring for both contrarian and trend bars. This feature helps traders visualize price movements and trends more effectively, enabling them to identify potential opportunities for both trend-following and contrarian trading strategies.
Risk Management: The tool incorporates risk management features that help traders to protect their capital and maximize potential returns. Users can set stop-loss and take-profit levels, as well as customize their risk exposure according to their individual preferences and trading style.
█ Calculations
█ What are the Buy/Sell signals based on?
The Buy/Sell signals use volatility and price range with a weighting function that can help reduce lag and respond faster to recent price changes. The function gives more weight to the most recent volatility values and absolute price changes, making the algorithm more responsive to changes in volatility and price moves. Using a model that factors in both price changes and volatility gives a bias toward more recent data. This advanced approach to trading signal generation incorporates the concepts of trend following and mean reversion while accounting for changing market volatility.
Traditional systems often use fixed parameters, which may not adapt quickly to changes in market conditions. This can lead to late entries or exits, potentially reducing profitability or increasing risk. Our algorithm uses a weighting function to give more importance to recent volatility values, and absolute price changes can make these signals more responsive. This is especially useful in dynamic markets where price swings and volatility can change rapidly.
Adapting to Recent Price Changes: Markets can often exhibit trending behavior over certain periods. By weighing recent price changes more heavily, the model can quickly identify and react to the emergence of new trends. This can lead to earlier entries in a new trend, potentially increasing profitability.
Adapting to Recent Volatility Changes: Markets can shift from low to high volatility regimes (and vice versa) quite rapidly. A model that gives more weight to recent volatility can adapt its signals to these changing conditions. For example, in high volatility conditions, the model might generate fewer signals to reduce the risk of false breakouts. Conversely, in low volatility conditions, the model might generate more signals to capitalize on trending behavior.
Adaptive Trading: The approach inherently leads to an adaptive trading system. Rather than using fixed parameters, the system can adjust its behavior based on recent market activity. This can lead to a more robust system that performs well across different market conditions.
█ What are the Sniper signals (contrarian signals) based on?
Our contrarian signals are based on deviation from the expected value. The algorithm quantifies the amount of variation or dispersion in a set of values. Non-expected values are the fundamental core of the signal generation process.
█ Reversal Cloud Calculation
The cloud uses the information of how much the price fluctuates over a specific time period and updates its equilibrium value automatically at new price changes. The price changes are used to predict what will happen next, and the band adapts accordingly. The algorithm assumes that past price changes can predict future market behavior.
█ Support and Resistance (S/R) Levels Calculation
The support and resistance levels use historical overbought and oversold levels combined with a weighted atr function to predict future support and resistance areas. This calculation can potentially give traders a great heads-up on where the price may find support and resistance at.
█ Trend & Bar coloring Calculation
Trend calculations with dynamic events are key in ever-changing markets. The main idea of the calculation method is to find the mathematical function that best fits the data points, by minimizing the sum of the squares of the vertical distances of each data point from the equilibrium. The outcome is a function that finds the best mathematical description of that data. Hence the trend output may vary depending on the asset and timeframe. A unique approach where the same settings can give different results.
█ Risk Management Calculation
The risk management system is not unique in itself and contains everything that can help traders to manage their risk, such as different types of stop losses, Take Profits calculations.
-----------------
Disclaimer
The information contained in my Scripts/Indicators/Ideas/Algos/Systems does not constitute financial advice or a solicitation to buy or sell any securities of any type. I will not accept liability for any loss or damage, including without limitation any loss of profit, which may arise directly or indirectly from the use of or reliance on such information.
All investments involve risk, and the past performance of a security, industry, sector, market, financial product, trading strategy, backtest, or individual's trading does not guarantee future results or returns. Investors are fully responsible for any investment decisions they make. Such decisions should be based solely on an evaluation of their financial circumstances, investment objectives, risk tolerance, and liquidity needs.
My Scripts/Indicators/Ideas/Algos/Systems are only for educational purposes!
GKD-M Accuracy Alchemist [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-M Accuracy Alchemist is a Metamorphosis module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ GKD-M Accuracy Alchemist
What is the Accuracy Alchemist?
The Accuracy Alchemist is designed to process up to 10 GKD-C indicators and create a compound signal that can be utilized in a GKD-BT backtest. It achieves this by applying an individual Solo Confirmation Simple backtest to each GKD-C indicator provided. The compound signal is derived from the cumulative accuracy rate of each candle within a specified date range.
To illustrate this process, consider the following scenario:
The Fisher Transform indicator has a 65% win rate for long positions on the current ticker.
The Vortex indicator has a 45% success rate on the current candle.
Suppose a long signal is generated by the Vortex indicator. However, this signal is disregarded because its accuracy is lower than that of the Fisher Transform. Now, imagine that the subsequent candle produces a long signal from the Fisher Transform indicator. This signal will be exported to the backtest. The GKD-C indicator that exhibits the highest accuracy for the current candle is chosen to generate the signal. The dominant indicator, determined by its accuracy, will always be used to generate signals. However, it is important to note that the current dominant indicator might not retain its dominance in the future if its accuracy rate falls below that of other indicators connected within the Accuracy Alchemist indicator.
The Accuracy Alchemist provides a comprehensive table that displays the dominant indicator based on accuracy, highlighted in green for the highest long accuracy rate and in red for the highest short accuracy rate. Additionally, the table presents the cumulative long and short accuracy rates for all indicators.
The functionality of the Accuracy Alchemist extends to several GKD-BT backtests, allowing for seamless integration. These backtests include:
-Solo Confirmation Simple
-Solo Confirmation Complex
-Solo Confirmation Super Complex
-Full GKD (as a Confirmation 1 indicator only)
-Confirmation Stack (as a Confirmation 1 indicator only)
By incorporating the Accuracy Alchemist, you gain the ability to evaluate and compare GKD-C Confirmation indicators within your full GKD trading system. It serves as an ideal tool to assess the performance of different confirmation indicators and aids in the selection process for determining which indicators to incorporate into your trading strategy.
Take Profit and Stoploss
The GKD system utilizes volatility-based take profits and stop losses, where each take profit and stop loss is calculated as a multiple of volatility. Users have the flexibility to adjust the multiplier values in the settings to suit their preferences. Accuracy Alchemist tests the accuracy of GKD-C Confirmation indicators and therefore has only 1 take profit and 1 stoploss. You can adjust the multipliers of both in the settings
Setting up Accuracy Alchemist
To use this indicator, you must import GKD-C Confirmation indicators and then activate them in the Accuracy Alchemist settings. Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from a GKD-C indicator and then activate it by checking the box next to the import. See below:
Volatility Types Included
17 types of volatility are included in this indicator
Close-to-Close
Parkinson
Garman-Klass
Rogers-Satchell
Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
Average True Range
True Range Double
Standard Deviation
Adaptive Deviation
Median Absolute Deviation
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Mean Absolute Deviation
Static Percent
Close-to-Close
Close-to-Close volatility is a classic and widely used volatility measure, sometimes referred to as historical volatility.
Volatility is an indicator of the speed of a stock price change. A stock with high volatility is one where the price changes rapidly and with a larger amplitude. The more volatile a stock is, the riskier it is.
Close-to-close historical volatility is calculated using only a stock's closing prices. It is the simplest volatility estimator. However, in many cases, it is not precise enough. Stock prices could jump significantly during a trading session and return to the opening value at the end. That means that a considerable amount of price information is not taken into account by close-to-close volatility.
Despite its drawbacks, Close-to-Close volatility is still useful in cases where the instrument doesn't have intraday prices. For example, mutual funds calculate their net asset values daily or weekly, and thus their prices are not suitable for more sophisticated volatility estimators.
Parkinson
Parkinson volatility is a volatility measure that uses the stock’s high and low price of the day.
The main difference between regular volatility and Parkinson volatility is that the latter uses high and low prices for a day, rather than only the closing price. This is useful as close-to-close prices could show little difference while large price movements could have occurred during the day. Thus, Parkinson's volatility is considered more precise and requires less data for calculation than close-to-close volatility.
One drawback of this estimator is that it doesn't take into account price movements after the market closes. Hence, it systematically undervalues volatility. This drawback is addressed in the Garman-Klass volatility estimator.
Garman-Klass
Garman-Klass is a volatility estimator that incorporates open, low, high, and close prices of a security.
Garman-Klass volatility extends Parkinson's volatility by taking into account the opening and closing prices. As markets are most active during the opening and closing of a trading session, it makes volatility estimation more accurate.
Garman and Klass also assumed that the process of price change follows a continuous diffusion process (Geometric Brownian motion). However, this assumption has several drawbacks. The method is not robust for opening jumps in price and trend movements.
Despite its drawbacks, the Garman-Klass estimator is still more effective than the basic formula since it takes into account not only the price at the beginning and end of the time interval but also intraday price extremes.
Researchers Rogers and Satchell have proposed a more efficient method for assessing historical volatility that takes into account price trends. See Rogers-Satchell Volatility for more detail.
Rogers-Satchell
Rogers-Satchell is an estimator for measuring the volatility of securities with an average return not equal to zero.
Unlike Parkinson and Garman-Klass estimators, Rogers-Satchell incorporates a drift term (mean return not equal to zero). As a result, it provides better volatility estimation when the underlying is trending.
The main disadvantage of this method is that it does not take into account price movements between trading sessions. This leads to an underestimation of volatility since price jumps periodically occur in the market precisely at the moments between sessions.
A more comprehensive estimator that also considers the gaps between sessions was developed based on the Rogers-Satchel formula in the 2000s by Yang-Zhang. See Yang Zhang Volatility for more detail.
Yang-Zhang
Yang Zhang is a historical volatility estimator that handles both opening jumps and the drift and has a minimum estimation error.
Yang-Zhang volatility can be thought of as a combination of the overnight (close-to-open volatility) and a weighted average of the Rogers-Satchell volatility and the day’s open-to-close volatility. It is considered to be 14 times more efficient than the close-to-close estimator.
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang (GKYZ) volatility estimator incorporates the returns of open, high, low, and closing prices in its calculation.
GKYZ volatility estimator takes into account overnight jumps but not the trend, i.e., it assumes that the underlying asset follows a Geometric Brownian Motion (GBM) process with zero drift. Therefore, the GKYZ volatility estimator tends to overestimate the volatility when the drift is different from zero. However, for a GBM process, this estimator is eight times more efficient than the close-to-close volatility estimator.
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
The Exponentially Weighted Moving Average (EWMA) is a quantitative or statistical measure used to model or describe a time series. The EWMA is widely used in finance, with the main applications being technical analysis and volatility modeling.
The moving average is designed such that older observations are given lower weights. The weights decrease exponentially as the data point gets older – hence the name exponentially weighted.
The only decision a user of the EWMA must make is the parameter lambda. The parameter decides how important the current observation is in the calculation of the EWMA. The higher the value of lambda, the more closely the EWMA tracks the original time series.
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
This is the simplest calculation of volatility. It's the standard deviation of ln(close/close(1)).
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
This is calculated using a short- and long-run mean of variance multiplied by ?.
?avg(var;M) + (1 ? ?) avg(var;N) = 2?var/(M+1-(M-1)L) + 2(1-?)var/(M+1-(M-1)L)
Solving for ? can be done by minimizing the mean squared error of estimation; that is, regressing L^-1var - avg(var; N) against avg(var; M) - avg(var; N) and using the resulting beta estimate as ?.
Average True Range
The average true range (ATR) is a technical analysis indicator, introduced by market technician J. Welles Wilder Jr. in his book New Concepts in Technical Trading Systems, that measures market volatility by decomposing the entire range of an asset price for that period.
The true range indicator is taken as the greatest of the following: current high less the current low; the absolute value of the current high less the previous close; and the absolute value of the current low less the previous close. The ATR is then a moving average, generally using 14 days, of the true ranges.
True Range Double
A special case of ATR that attempts to correct for volatility skew.
Standard Deviation
Standard deviation is a statistic that measures the dispersion of a dataset relative to its mean and is calculated as the square root of the variance. The standard deviation is calculated as the square root of variance by determining each data point's deviation relative to the mean. If the data points are further from the mean, there is a higher deviation within the data set; thus, the more spread out the data, the higher the standard deviation.
Adaptive Deviation
By definition, the Standard Deviation (STD, also represented by the Greek letter sigma ? or the Latin letter s) is a measure that is used to quantify the amount of variation or dispersion of a set of data values. In technical analysis, we usually use it to measure the level of current volatility.
Standard Deviation is based on Simple Moving Average calculation for mean value. This version of standard deviation uses the properties of EMA to calculate what can be called a new type of deviation, and since it is based on EMA, we can call it EMA deviation. Additionally, Perry Kaufman's efficiency ratio is used to make it adaptive (since all EMA type calculations are nearly perfect for adapting).
The difference when compared to the standard is significant--not just because of EMA usage, but the efficiency ratio makes it a "bit more logical" in very volatile market conditions.
Median Absolute Deviation
The median absolute deviation is a measure of statistical dispersion. Moreover, the MAD is a robust statistic, being more resilient to outliers in a data set than the standard deviation. In the standard deviation, the distances from the mean are squared, so large deviations are weighted more heavily, and thus outliers can heavily influence it. In the MAD, the deviations of a small number of outliers are irrelevant.
Because the MAD is a more robust estimator of scale than the sample variance or standard deviation, it works better with distributions without a mean or variance, such as the Cauchy distribution.
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Average True Range (ATR) is a widely used indicator for many occasions in technical analysis. It is calculated as the RMA of the true range. This version adds a "twist": it uses Perry Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio to calculate adaptive true range.
Mean Absolute Deviation
The mean absolute deviation (MAD) is a measure of variability that indicates the average distance between observations and their mean. MAD uses the original units of the data, which simplifies interpretation. Larger values signify that the data points spread out further from the average. Conversely, lower values correspond to data points bunching closer to it. The mean absolute deviation is also known as the mean deviation and average absolute deviation.
This definition of the mean absolute deviation sounds similar to the standard deviation (SD). While both measure variability, they have different calculations. In recent years, some proponents of MAD have suggested that it replace the SD as the primary measure because it is a simpler concept that better fits real life.
Static Percent
Static Percent allows the user to insert their own constant percent that will then be used to create take profits and stoploss
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
8. Metamorphosis - a technical indicator that produces a compound signal from the combination of other GKD indicators*
*(not part of the NNFX algorithm)
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
What is an Metamorphosis indicator?
The concept of a metamorphosis indicator involves the integration of two or more GKD indicators to generate a compound signal. This is achieved by evaluating the accuracy of each indicator and selecting the signal from the indicator with the highest accuracy. As an illustration, let's consider a scenario where we calculate the accuracy of 10 indicators and choose the signal from the indicator that demonstrates the highest accuracy.
The resulting output from the metamorphosis indicator can then be utilized in a GKD-BT backtest by occupying a slot that aligns with the purpose of the metamorphosis indicator. The slot can be a GKD-B, GKD-C, or GKD-E slot, depending on the specific requirements and objectives of the indicator. This allows for seamless integration and utilization of the compound signal within the GKD-BT framework.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v2.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
6. GKD-M - Metamorphosis module (Metamorphosis, Number 8 in the NNFX algorithm, but not part of the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data to A backtest module wherein the various components of the GKD system are combined to create a trading signal.
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Full GKD Backtest
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: Composite RSI
Confirmation 2: uf2018
Continuation: Vortex
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Metamorphosis: Fisher Transform, Universal Oscillator, Aroon, Vortex .. combined
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD system.
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation gives signal
2. Baseline agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Confirmation 2 agrees
6. Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Standard Entry
1a. GKD-C Confirmation gives signal
2a. Baseline agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Baseline agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Basline gives signal
2. Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Confirmation 2 agrees
6. Volatility/Volume agrees
7. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSBC Bars Back' prior
1-Candle Baseline Entry
1a. GKD-B Baseline gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5a. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSBC Bars Back' prior
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Baseline agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Volatility/Volume agrees
Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume gives signal
2. Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Confirmation 2 agrees
6. Baseline agrees
7. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
1-Candle Volatility/Volume Entry
1a. GKD-V Volatility/Volume gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5a. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSVVC Bars Back' prior
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Volatility/Volume agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Baseline agrees
Confirmation 2 Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 2 gives signal
2. Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Volatility/Volume agrees
6. Baseline agrees
7. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
1-Candle Confirmation 2 Entry
1a. GKD-C Confirmation 2 gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5a. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSC2C Bars Back' prior
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Confirmation 2 agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Volatility/Volume agrees
5b. Baseline agrees
PullBack Entry
1a. GKD-B Baseline gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle
1b. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
2b. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Volatility/Volume agrees
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, 1-Candle Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, 1-Candle Baseline Entry, Volatility/Volume Entry, 1-Candle Volatility/Volume Entry, Confirmation 2 Entry, 1-Candle Confirmation 2 Entry, or Pullback entry triggered previously
2. Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
4. Confirmation 1 agrees
5. Baseline agrees
6. Confirmation 2 agrees
█ Connecting to Backtests
All GKD indicators are chained indicators meaning you export the value of the indicators to specialized backtest to creat your GKD trading system. Each indicator contains a proprietary signal generation algo that will only work with GKD backtests. You can find these backtests using the links below.
GKD-BT Giga Confirmation Stack Backtest:
GKD-BT Giga Stacks Backtest:
GKD-BT Full Giga Kaleidoscope Backtest:
GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Super Complex Backtest:
GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Complex Backtest:
GKD-BT Solo Confirmation Simple Backtest:
GKD-C STD-Filtered, Adaptive Exponential HMA [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C STD-Filtered, Adaptive Exponential HMA is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ GKD-C STD-Filtered, Adaptive Exponential HMA
What is the STD-Filtered, Adaptive Exponential HMA?
The Adaptive Hull Moving Average (AHMA) is a powerful technical indicator that combines the advantages of both the Hull Moving Average (HMA) and adaptive filtering techniques. It is primarily used by traders and investors to identify trends in financial markets and generate buy/sell signals. This essay aims to provide a comprehensive understanding of the AHMA, its components, and its applications in trading and investing.
Components of Adaptive Hull Moving Average
Exponential Moving Average (EMA)
The EMA is a widely-used technical indicator that assigns more weight to recent data points, making it more responsive to new information. The EMA is calculated using a smoothing factor (alpha), which determines the degree of responsiveness.
Adaptive Alpha
The adaptive alpha is a crucial component of the AHMA, as it determines the optimal alpha value for the EMA calculations based on the market's signal-to-noise ratio (SNR). This adaptive approach ensures that the indicator responds appropriately to different market conditions, providing more accurate buy/sell signals.
Hull Moving Average (HMA)
The HMA is a popular technical indicator that combines the advantages of weighted moving averages and simple moving averages. The HMA is designed to be more responsive to price changes while reducing lag, making it a valuable tool for trend analysis.
Standard Deviation Filter
The standard deviation filter is an optional component of the AHMA that helps reduce noise in the input data series. By applying this filter, traders can further improve the accuracy of the AHMA, minimizing false signals.
How this is done
Important functions:
aEMA(float src, float alpha) =>
float ema = src
ema := na(ema ) ? src : nz(ema ) + alpha * (src - nz(ema ))
ema
adaptiveAlpha(float SNR, float periodL, float periodH)=>
float al = 2.0 / (periodL + 1.0)
float ah = 2.0 / (periodH + 1.0)
float out = (ah + SNR * (al - ah))
out
hullAdaptiveMovingAverage(float src, int persnr, int perfast, int perslow, int gain, float beta)=>
float signal = math.abs(src - nz(src ))
float noise = 0
for i = 0 to persnr - 1
noise += math.abs(nz(src ) - nz(src ))
float SNR = beta * signal / noise * math.sqrt(persnr)
float exp2SNR = math.exp(2.0 * SNR)
float tanhSNR = (exp2SNR - 1.0) / (exp2SNR + 1.0)
float w = math.pow(tanhSNR, gain)
float a1 = adaptiveAlpha(w, perfast * 0.5, perslow * 0.5)
float a2 = adaptiveAlpha(w, perfast, perslow)
float a3 = adaptiveAlpha(w, math.sqrt(perfast), math.sqrt(perslow))
float h1 = src
float h2 = src
float h3 = src
h1 := aEMA(h1, a1)
h2 := aEMA(h2, a2)
h3 := (2 * h1 - h2)
h3 := aEMA(h3, a3)
h3
stdFilter(float src, int len, float filter)=>
float price = src
float filtdev = filter * ta.stdev(src, len)
price := math.abs(price - nz(price )) < filtdev ? nz(price ) : price
price
1. aEMA(): This function calculates the exponential moving average (EMA) of a given data series (src) using the specified alpha value. It initializes the EMA with the data series and then calculates it recursively using the previous EMA and alpha value.
2. adaptiveAlpha(): This function calculates the adaptive alpha value based on the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), the fast period (periodL), and the slow period (periodH). It computes the adaptive alpha by linearly interpolating between the fast and slow alpha values based on the SNR.
3. hullAdaptiveMovingAverage(): This function implements the AHMA by taking the input data series (src), the signal-to-noise ratio period (persnr), fast and slow periods (perfast, perslow), gain, and a beta value. It calculates the SNR by dividing the absolute difference between the current data point and its previous value (signal) by the sum of the absolute differences between consecutive data points (noise) over the specified SNR period. The function then computes the adaptive alpha values (a1, a2, a3) and calculates the Hull Moving Average (HMA) using three EMAs (h1, h2, h3).
4. stdFilter(): This function applies a standard deviation filter to the input data series (src) using the specified filter period (len) and filter coefficient (filter). It filters out the data points whose absolute difference from the previous data point is less than the specified multiple of the standard deviation.
The code computes the AHMA of the input data series (src) by applying the hullAdaptiveMovingAverage() function, and if the filter option is set to "Both" or "AEHMA" and the filter coefficient is greater than 0, the standard deviation filter is applied to the AHMA using the stdFilter() function. Finally, the output is stored in the variable "out," and the previous value of the output is stored in the variable "sig."
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: STD-Filtered, Adaptive Exponential HMA as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
1-Candle Rule Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close)
2. GKD-B Volatility/Volume agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
4. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
]█ Setting up the GKD
The GKD system involves chaining indicators together. These are the steps to set this up.
Use a GKD-C indicator alone on a chart
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Use a GKD-V indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Use a GKD-B indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Baseline (Baseline, Backtest)
1. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline"
Volatility/Volume (Volatility/Volume, Backte st)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Solo"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Signal Type" setting to "Crossing" (neither traditional nor both can be backtested)
3. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Volatility/Volume"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, a) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Trading" if using a directional GKD-V indicator; or, b) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full" if using a directional or non-directional GKD-V indicator (non-directional GKD-V can only test Longs and Shorts separately)
6. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Side" to "Long" or "Short
7. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
Solo Confirmation Simple (Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
1. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Solo Confirmation Complex without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
6. Import the GKD-C into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Solo Confirmation Complex with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
7. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Full GKD without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
9. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Full GKD with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Import the GKD-C Continuation indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
9. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
10. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Baseline + Volatility/Volume (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, make sure the "Signal Type" setting is set to "Traditional"
3. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
5. Import the GKD-V into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full". For this backtest, you must test Longs and Shorts separately
7. To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you can test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-B Baseline
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Stacked 1: None
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 1
Outputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation 2 indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-BT Backtest or GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Stacked 1: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+ or GKD-BT Backtest
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C STD-Filtered, Kaiser Window FIR Digital Filter [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C STD-Filtered, Kaiser Window FIR Digital Filter is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ GKD-C STD-Filtered, Kaiser Window FIR Digital Filter
What is a Kaiser Window FIR Digital Filter?
A Kaiser Window is a type of window function used in digital signal processing to design Finite Impulse Response (FIR) filters. FIR filters are digital filters that have a finite duration impulse response.
The Kaiser Window is a window function that is used to shape the impulse response of an FIR filter. The window function is applied to the coefficients of the ideal low-pass filter, which results in a truncated and windowed version of the ideal filter.
The Kaiser Window is designed using the Kaiser-Bessel window method, which is a technique for designing FIR filters with a specified stopband attenuation and transition width. The method uses the Kaiser Window to control the magnitude of the filter coefficients in the transition band and stopband.
The Kaiser Window is characterized by a parameter called the "beta" parameter, which controls the trade-off between the transition width and the stopband attenuation of the filter. The larger the beta value, the narrower the transition width and the higher the stopband attenuation.
Kaiser Window FIR filters have a number of advantages, including good stopband attenuation, narrow transition width, and the ability to control the ripple in the passband. However, they also have some disadvantages, including a high computational complexity and a non-linear phase response.
What is the STD-Filtered, Kaiser Window FIR Digital Filter?
This indicator is an implementation of a Kaiser window finite impulse response (FIR) digital filter. The Kaiser window is a widely used window function for designing FIR filters due to its ability to control the trade-off between the main lobe width and sidelobe levels. The design process begins with the calculation of the zero-order modified Bessel function of the first kind using an iterative method. This function plays a crucial role in the calculation of the Kaiser window coefficients.
The filter characteristics, such as passband, stopband, passband ripple, and stopband attenuation, are user-defined inputs. Based on these inputs, and filtering order function estimates the filter length, alpha value (a parameter governing the shape of the Kaiser window), and adjusted passband and stopband values. The filter length is adjusted to be an odd integer to maintain filter symmetry, which is essential for linear phase response.
Subsequently, a normalization function calculates the filter coefficients and the Kaiser window coefficients. The Kaiser window coefficients are obtained by applying the zero-order modified Bessel function to the window samples. The filter coefficients are derived by multiplying the sinc function with the Kaiser window coefficients, and then normalized to preserve the filter's gain in the passband.
The filter response function computes the output of the FIR filter by convolving the input signal with the filter coefficients. Optionally, the output signal can be passed through a standard deviation filter, as determined by the user-selected filter options.
The Kaiser window FIR digital filter presented in this study is suitable for various applications, including noise reduction, signal smoothing, and extraction of relevant information from complex data sets. The implementation allows users to adapt the filter performance according to their specific requirements by adjusting the passband ripple, stopband attenuation, passband bars, and stopband bars, which determine the filter's frequency response and transition band characteristics.
The filter design process relies on the Kaiser window's flexibility, as it can be shaped according to the alpha parameter calculated in the filterOrder() function. This parameter controls the trade-off between the filter's main lobe width and sidelobe levels. A larger alpha value results in higher sidelobe suppression at the cost of a wider main lobe, whereas a smaller alpha value leads to a narrower main lobe but less sidelobe suppression. This trade-off allows users to fine-tune the filter's performance for specific applications.
In addition to the filter's frequency domain characteristics, the implementation ensures a linear phase response by maintaining filter symmetry. Linear phase filters are crucial for applications where the preservation of the signal's phase information is essential, such as audio processing and communication systems.
The optional standard deviation filter serves as a supplementary tool for enhancing the output signal. By applying this filter, users can further suppress unwanted high-frequency components and improve the overall signal quality. This feature is particularly useful in applications where the noise characteristics are unknown or vary over time.
In summary, the Kaiser window FIR digital filter offers a highly customizable and efficient solution for signal processing tasks. The combination of user-defined filter characteristics, a flexible Kaiser window function, linear phase response, and optional standard deviation filtering makes this implementation a powerful and versatile tool for a wide range of applications in various domains, including audio processing, communication systems, and data analysis.
How this is done
Kaiser Window FIR Digital Filter calculations:
/Bessel function, z-order hyperbolic
zorderHyperbolicBessel(float x)=>
float besselAccuracy = 0.000001
float bessel = 1.0
float summ = 0
float temp = 0
float k = 2.0
float factorial = 1.0
temp := x / 2
summ := temp * temp
bessel += summ
while summ > besselAccuracy
factorial := factorial * k
temp *= x / 2
summ := temp / factorial
summ := summ * summ
bessel += summ
k += 1.0
bessel
//Filter length estimations
filterOrder(float PassBandRipple, float StopBandAttenuation, float PassBandBars, float StopBandBars)=>
float sbripple = 0
float pbripple = 0
float ripple = 0
float attenuation = 0
float bandwidth = 0
float d = 0
float n = 0
float x = 0
float alpha = 0
float FilterLength = 0.
PassBand = 1 / PassBandBars
StopBand = 1 / StopBandBars
bandwidth := PassBand + StopBand
if bandwidth >= 0.5
PassBand := 0.5 * PassBand / bandwidth
StopBand := 0.5 * StopBand / bandwidth
sbripple := math.pow(10.0, (-0.05 * StopBandAttenuation))
pbripple := math.pow(10.0, (0.05 * PassBandRipple)) - 1.0
ripple := math.min(sbripple, pbripple)
attenuation := -20 * math.log(ripple) / math.log(10)
if math.round(attenuation, 5) <= 21.0
alpha := 0.0
d := 0.9222
if math.round(attenuation, 5) > 50.0
alpha := 0.1102 * (attenuation - 8.7)
d := (attenuation - 7.95) / 14.36
if math.round(attenuation, 5) > 21.0 and math.round(attenuation, 5) <= 50
alpha := (0.5842 * math.pow((attenuation - 21.0), 0.4)) + (0.07886 * (attenuation - 21.0))
d := (attenuation - 7.95) / 14.36
n := (d / StopBand) + 1.0
x := math.round(n)
if x % 2 < 1
FilterLength := x
else
FilterLength := x - 1
Normalization(float PassBandRipple, float StopBandAttenuation, float PassBandBars, float StopBandBars)=>
float filter = 0
float Ioalfa = 0
float temp = 0
float norm = 0
= filterOrder(PassBandRipple, StopBandAttenuation, PassBandBars, StopBandBars)
int M = int(FilterLength / 2)
float filterCoeff = array.new(FilterLength + 1, 0)
float kaiserWindow = array.new(M + 1, 0)
//Window function
norm := M
Ioalfa := zorderHyperbolicBessel(alpha)
for i = 1 to M
temp := i / norm
array.set(kaiserWindow, i, zorderHyperbolicBessel(alpha * math.sqrt(1 - (temp * temp))) / Ioalfa)
//filter coefficients
array.set(filterCoeff, 0, 2.0 * (PassBand + (0.5 * StopBand)))
norm := array.get(filterCoeff, 0)
temp := math.pi * array.get(filterCoeff, 0)
for i = 1 to M
array.set(filterCoeff, i, math.sin(i * temp) * array.get(kaiserWindow, i) / (i * math.pi))
norm := norm + (2 * array.get(filterCoeff, i))
//casual conversion and normalization
float NormCoef = array.new(FilterLength + 1, 0)
for i = M + 1 to FilterLength
array.set(filterCoeff, i, array.get(filterCoeff, i - M))
for i = 0 to M - 1
array.set(filterCoeff, i, array.get(filterCoeff, FilterLength - i))
array.set(filterCoeff, M, 2.0 * (PassBand + (0.5 * StopBand)))
for i = 0 to FilterLength
array.set(NormCoef, i, array.get(filterCoeff, i) / norm)
filterResponse(float src, float NormCoef, int per)=>
float valueBuf = 0
float temp = 0
float temp1 = 0
float Response = 0.0
int i = 0
int filterlength = 0
while filterlength <= per
valueBuf := nz(src )
Response := Response + valueBuf * array.get(NormCoef, filterlength)
filterlength += 1
Response
Here's a detailed explanation of the functions involed in the code posted above:
1. zorderHyperbolicBessel(float x): This function calculates the zero-order modified Bessel function of the first kind (I0) for a given input x. The Bessel function is used in the calculation of the Kaiser window coefficients.
-besselAccuracy: The desired accuracy for the Bessel function calculation (0.000001).
-bessel: The initial value of the Bessel function (1.0).
-summ: The sum of terms in the series representation of the Bessel function.
-temp: A temporary variable to store intermediate values.
-k: The index for the series representation of the Bessel function.
-factorial: The factorial of k, used to calculate the denominator of the series terms.
The function iteratively calculates the terms in the series representation of the Bessel function until the sum of the squared terms is less than the desired accuracy. The final value of the Bessel function is returned.
2. filterOrder(PassBandRipple, StopBandAttenuation, PassBandBars, StopBandBars): This function estimates the filter length, alpha value, passband, and stopband for the Kaiser window-based FIR filter based on the given filter characteristics.
-PassBandRipple: The maximum allowed passband ripple in decibels.
-StopBandAttenuation: The minimum required stopband attenuation in decibels.
-PassBandBars: The number of bars in the passband.
-StopBandBars: The number of bars in the stopband.
The function first calculates the normalized passband and stopband frequencies. If their sum is greater than or equal to 0.5, they are scaled down to ensure the bandwidth is less than the Nyquist frequency.
-sbripple: The stopband ripple, calculated as 10^(-0.05 * StopBandAttenuation).
-pbripple: The passband ripple, calculated as 10^(0.05 * PassBandRipple) - 1.
-ripple: The minimum of the passband and stopband ripple values.
-attenuation: The attenuation in decibels, calculated as -20 * log10(ripple).
The alpha value and the variable d are determined based on the attenuation value:
-If attenuation <= 21 dB, alpha = 0 and d = 0.9222.
-If attenuation > 50 dB, alpha = 0.1102 * (attenuation - 8.7) and d = (attenuation - 7.95) / 14.36.
-If 21 dB < attenuation <= 50 dB, alpha = (0.5842 * (attenuation - 21)^0.4) + (0.07886 * (attenuation - 21)) and d = (attenuation - 7.95) / 14.36.
Finally, the filter length n is calculated as (d / StopBand) + 1. If n is odd, the filter length is set to n; otherwise, it is set to n - 1. The function returns an array containing the filter length, alpha value, passband, and stopband.
The functions Normalization() and filterResponse() play critical roles in the implementation of the Kaiser window FIR digital filter. They focus on calculating normalized filter coefficients and applying the filter to an input signal, respectively.
Normalization() function:
1. The function accepts four input parameters: PassBandRipple, StopBandAttenuation, PassBandBars, and StopBandBars. These parameters define the filter's desired performance characteristics.
2. It then calls the filterOrder() function to obtain the filter length, alpha parameter, passband, and stopband.
3. Next, the function calculates the Kaiser window coefficients using the obtained alpha parameter and the zero-order hyperbolic Bessel function. This is done by iterating from 1 to M (half of the filter length) and calculating the window coefficients using the formula:
zorderHyperbolicBessel(alpha * math.sqrt(1 - (temp * temp))) / Ioalfa
4. The filter coefficients are computed by multiplying the Kaiser window coefficients with the sinc function values. The filter coefficients are then stored in an array called filterCoeff.
5. The function performs causal conversion and normalization of the filter coefficients. The coefficients are normalized by dividing each element by the norm value calculated earlier.
6. Finally, the function returns the normalized filter coefficients NormCoef and the filter length FilterLength.
filterResponse() function:
1. This function is responsible for applying the calculated filter to the input signal src. It accepts three input parameters: the source signal src, the normalized filter coefficients NormCoef, and the period per over which the filter should be applied.
2. It initializes variables valueBuf, Response, and filterlength to store intermediate values and the final filtered signal output.
3. The function then iterates over the input signal for a given period. For each sample in the period, the function multiplies the input signal's value by the corresponding filter coefficient and accumulates the result in the Response variable.
4. Once the iteration is complete, the function returns the filtered signal output Response.
To wrap up, the zorderHyperbolicBessel() function calculates the zero-order modified Bessel function of the first kind, which is used in the Kaiser window calculation. The filterOrder() function estimates the filter length, alpha value, passband, and stopband for the Kaiser window-based FIR filter based on the given filter characteristics. These functions are part of the implementation of a Kaiser window FIR digital filter. The Kaiser window is a type of window function used to design finite impulse response (FIR) filters. The filter length, alpha value, passband, and stopband determined by the filterOrder() function are utilized in the subsequent steps of the filter design process.
Following the filterOrder() function, the Normalization() function calculates the filter coefficients and the Kaiser window coefficients. These coefficients are used in the filterResponse() function to compute the output of the FIR filter.
In the main body of the code, user-defined input values for PassBandBars, StopBandBars, StopBandAttenuation, and PassBandRipple are taken. These inputs are used to estimate the filter order, passband, and stopband using the filterOrder() function. Then, the Kaiser window coefficients and filter coefficients are computed using the Normalization() function.
Finally, the output of the FIR filter is computed using the filterResponse() function, which calculates the filtered response based on the input signal and the filter coefficients. The output signal is then passed through a standard deviation filter (stdFilter()) if the user has selected the "Both" or "Kaiser Window FIR Digital Filter" filter options, and the final output signal is stored in the out variable.
In summary, the code provided is an implementation of a Kaiser window FIR digital filter that processes an input signal based on user-defined filter characteristics (passband, stopband, passband ripple, and stopband attenuation). The zorderHyperbolicBessel() and filterOrder() functions are critical components in the filter design process, calculating the zero-order modified Bessel function and estimating the filter length, alpha value, passband, and stopband, respectively.
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: STD-Filtered, Kaiser Window FIR Digital Filter as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
1-Candle Rule Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close)
2. GKD-B Volatility/Volume agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
4. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
]█ Setting up the GKD
The GKD system involves chaining indicators together. These are the steps to set this up.
Use a GKD-C indicator alone on a chart
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Use a GKD-V indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Use a GKD-B indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Baseline (Baseline, Backtest)
1. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline"
Volatility/Volume (Volatility/Volume, Backte st)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Solo"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Signal Type" setting to "Crossing" (neither traditional nor both can be backtested)
3. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Volatility/Volume"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, a) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Trading" if using a directional GKD-V indicator; or, b) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full" if using a directional or non-directional GKD-V indicator (non-directional GKD-V can only test Longs and Shorts separately)
6. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Side" to "Long" or "Short
7. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
Solo Confirmation Simple (Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
1. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Solo Confirmation Complex without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
6. Import the GKD-C into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Solo Confirmation Complex with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
7. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Full GKD without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
9. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Full GKD with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Import the GKD-C Continuation indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
9. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
10. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Baseline + Volatility/Volume (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, make sure the "Signal Type" setting is set to "Traditional"
3. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
5. Import the GKD-V into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full". For this backtest, you must test Longs and Shorts separately
7. To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you can test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-B Baseline
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Stacked 1: None
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 1
Outputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation 2 indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-BT Backtest or GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Stacked 1: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+ or GKD-BT Backtest
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Stochastic of RSX [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Stochastic of RSX is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: Stochastic of RSX as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
1-Candle Rule Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close)
2. GKD-B Volatility/Volume agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
4. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
]█ Setting up the GKD
The GKD system involves chaining indicators together. These are the steps to set this up.
Use a GKD-C indicator alone on a chart
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Use a GKD-V indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Use a GKD-B indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Baseline (Baseline, Backtest)
1. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline"
Volatility/Volume (Volatility/Volume, Backte st)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Solo"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Signal Type" setting to "Crossing" (neither traditional nor both can be backtested)
3. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Volatility/Volume"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, a) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Trading" if using a directional GKD-V indicator; or, b) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full" if using a directional or non-directional GKD-V indicator (non-directional GKD-V can only test Longs and Shorts separately)
6. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Side" to "Long" or "Short
7. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
Solo Confirmation Simple (Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
1. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Solo Confirmation Complex without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
6. Import the GKD-C into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Solo Confirmation Complex with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
7. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Full GKD without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
9. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Full GKD with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Import the GKD-C Continuation indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
9. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
10. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Baseline + Volatility/Volume (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, make sure the "Signal Type" setting is set to "Traditional"
3. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
5. Import the GKD-V into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full". For this backtest, you must test Longs and Shorts separately
7. To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you can test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
█ GKD-C Stochastic of RSX
What is the RSX?
The Jurik RSX is a technical indicator developed by Mark Jurik to measure the momentum and strength of price movements in financial markets, such as stocks, commodities, and currencies. It is an advanced version of the traditional Relative Strength Index (RSI), designed to offer smoother and less lagging signals compared to the standard RSI.
The main advantage of the Jurik RSX is that it provides more accurate and timely signals for traders and analysts, thanks to its improved calculation methods that reduce noise and lag in the indicator's output. This enables better decision-making when analyzing market trends and potential trading opportunities.
What is Stochastic RSI?
Stochastic RSI (StochRSI) is a technical analysis indicator that combines the concepts of the Stochastic Oscillator and the Relative Strength Index (RSI). It is used to identify potential overbought and oversold conditions in financial markets, as well as to generate buy and sell signals based on the momentum of price movements.
To understand Stochastic RSI, let's first define the two individual indicators it is based on:
Stochastic Oscillator: A momentum indicator that compares a particular closing price of a security to a range of its prices over a certain period. It is used to identify potential trend reversals and generate buy and sell signals.
Relative Strength Index (RSI): A momentum oscillator that measures the speed and change of price movements. It ranges between 0 and 100 and is used to identify overbought or oversold conditions in the market.
Now, let's dive into the Stochastic RSI:
The Stochastic RSI applies the Stochastic Oscillator formula to the RSI values, essentially creating an indicator of an indicator. It helps to identify when the RSI is in overbought or oversold territory with more sensitivity, providing more frequent signals than the standalone RSI.
The formula for StochRSI is as follows:
StochRSI = (RSI - Lowest Low RSI) / (Highest High RSI - Lowest Low RSI)
Where:
RSI is the current RSI value.
Lowest Low RSI is the lowest RSI value over a specified period (e.g., 14 days).
Highest High RSI is the highest RSI value over the same specified period.
StochRSI ranges from 0 to 1, but it is usually multiplied by 100 for easier interpretation, making the range 0 to 100. Like the RSI, values close to 0 indicate oversold conditions, while values close to 100 indicate overbought conditions. However, since the StochRSI is more sensitive, traders typically use 20 as the oversold threshold and 80 as the overbought threshold.
Traders use the StochRSI to generate buy and sell signals by looking for crossovers with a signal line (a moving average of the StochRSI), similar to the way the Stochastic Oscillator is used. When the StochRSI crosses above the signal line, it is considered a bullish signal, and when it crosses below the signal line, it is considered a bearish signal.
It is essential to use the Stochastic RSI in conjunction with other technical analysis tools and indicators, as well as to consider the overall market context, to improve the accuracy and reliability of trading signals.
What is the Stochastic of RSX?
Instead of using RSI for the Stochastic RSI calculation, this indicator uses RSX.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-B Baseline
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Stacked 1: None
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 1
Outputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation 2 indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-BT Backtest or GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Stacked 1: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+ or GKD-BT Backtest
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C Volatility Ratio Adaptive RSX [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C Volatility Ratio Adaptive RSX is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: Volatility Ratio Adaptive RSX as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
1-Candle Rule Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close)
2. GKD-B Volatility/Volume agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
4. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
]█ Setting up the GKD
The GKD system involves chaining indicators together. These are the steps to set this up.
Use a GKD-C indicator alone on a chart
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Use a GKD-V indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Use a GKD-B indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Baseline (Baseline, Backtest)
1. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline"
Volatility/Volume (Volatility/Volume, Backte st)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Solo"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Signal Type" setting to "Crossing" (neither traditional nor both can be backtested)
3. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Volatility/Volume"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, a) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Trading" if using a directional GKD-V indicator; or, b) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full" if using a directional or non-directional GKD-V indicator (non-directional GKD-V can only test Longs and Shorts separately)
6. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Side" to "Long" or "Short
7. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
Solo Confirmation Simple (Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
1. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Solo Confirmation Complex without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
6. Import the GKD-C into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Solo Confirmation Complex with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
7. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Full GKD without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
9. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Full GKD with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Import the GKD-C Continuation indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
9. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
10. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Baseline + Volatility/Volume (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, make sure the "Signal Type" setting is set to "Traditional"
3. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
5. Import the GKD-V into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full". For this backtest, you must test Longs and Shorts separately
7. To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you can test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
█ GKD-C Volatility Ratio Adaptive RSX
What is the RSX?
The Jurik RSX is a technical indicator developed by Mark Jurik to measure the momentum and strength of price movements in financial markets, such as stocks, commodities, and currencies. It is an advanced version of the traditional Relative Strength Index (RSI), designed to offer smoother and less lagging signals compared to the standard RSI.
The main advantage of the Jurik RSX is that it provides more accurate and timely signals for traders and analysts, thanks to its improved calculation methods that reduce noise and lag in the indicator's output. This enables better decision-making when analyzing market trends and potential trading opportunities.
What is the Voaltility Ratio?
The volatility ratio is a technical analysis indicator used by traders and investors to measure the relative volatility of a financial instrument, such as stocks, commodities, or forex. It is calculated by comparing the True Range (TR) of the instrument to its average range over a specified period, typically expressed as a percentage. The higher the volatility ratio, the more volatile the instrument is considered to be.
The formula for the volatility ratio is:
Volatility Ratio (VR) = (Today's True Range) / (Average True Range over a specified period)
Where:
Today's True Range is the highest value among:
Current High - Current Low
Current High - Previous Close
Current Low - Previous Close
Average True Range (ATR) is the average of the True Range values over a specified period, typically 14 days.
Traders and investors use the volatility ratio to gauge the risk associated with a particular instrument and to identify potential entry and exit points. A high volatility ratio can signal strong price movements, while a low ratio may indicate stability or stagnation in price. The volatility ratio can also be used in conjunction with other technical indicators to create a more comprehensive trading strategy.
What is Volatility Ratio Adaptive RSX?
For this indicator the calculation of volatility is changed to the following:
Volatility Ratio (VR) = (Standard Deviation of Price) / (Simple Moving Average of Standard Deviation over a specified period)
Where:
src: source data (typically closing prices) of the financial instrument.
per: the period over which the standard deviation and simple moving average are calculated.
This version of the Volatility Ratio helps identify periods of high or low price volatility relative to the historical average over the specified period. A value above 1 indicates higher than average volatility, while a value below 1 suggests lower than average volatility. Traders and investors can use this indicator to assess the risk of a particular instrument, determine market sentiment, or identify potential trading opportunities.
What this looks like inside:
This code defines two functions, rsx() and volatratio(), and then calculates the Volatility Ratio Adaptive RSX by combining their outputs.
1. rsx(src, len, speed): This function calculates the Adaptive RSX (Relative Strength Index) based on the input source data (src), the lookback period (len), and the speed factor (speed). The function computes a smoothed version of the price momentum (mom_out) and its absolute version (moa_out) using an iterative process. The final output, rsiout, is the Adaptive RSX oscillator value, which is calculated by normalizing the momentum ratio to the 0-100 range.
2. volatratio(src, per): This function calculates the Volatility Ratio using the input source data (src) and the lookback period (per). It computes the standard deviation (dev) and its simple moving average (devavg) over the specified period, and then calculates the Volatility Ratio by dividing the standard deviation by its average.
The main part of the code calculates the Volatility Ratio Adaptive RSX using the rsx() and volatratio() functions:
-volRatio = volatratio(src, inpPeriod): It calculates the Volatility Ratio using the input source data (src) and the lookback period (inpPeriod).
-rsxout = _rsx(src, int(inpPeriod/volRatio), inpSpeed): It calculates the Adaptive RSX using the input source data (src), the adjusted lookback period (which is the original period divided by the Volatility Ratio), and the speed factor (inpSpeed).
The final output, rsxout, represents the Volatility Ratio Adaptive RSX oscillator. Traders can use this oscillator to identify potential entry and exit points, confirm trends, or detect price reversals based on overbought or oversold conditions.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-B Baseline
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Stacked 1: None
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 1
Outputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation 2 indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-BT Backtest or GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Stacked 1: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+ or GKD-BT Backtest
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C RSX VDI w/ Confidence Bands [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C RSX VDI w/ Confidence Bands is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: RSX VDI w/ Confidence Bands as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
1-Candle Rule Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close)
2. GKD-B Volatility/Volume agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
4. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
]█ Setting up the GKD
The GKD system involves chaining indicators together. These are the steps to set this up.
Use a GKD-C indicator alone on a chart
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Use a GKD-V indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Use a GKD-B indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Baseline (Baseline, Backtest)
1. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline"
Volatility/Volume (Volatility/Volume, Backte st)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Solo"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Signal Type" setting to "Crossing" (neither traditional nor both can be backtested)
3. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Volatility/Volume"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, a) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Trading" if using a directional GKD-V indicator; or, b) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full" if using a directional or non-directional GKD-V indicator (non-directional GKD-V can only test Longs and Shorts separately)
6. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Side" to "Long" or "Short
7. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
Solo Confirmation Simple (Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
1. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Solo Confirmation Complex without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
6. Import the GKD-C into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Solo Confirmation Complex with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
7. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Full GKD without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
9. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Full GKD with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Import the GKD-C Continuation indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
9. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
10. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Baseline + Volatility/Volume (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, make sure the "Signal Type" setting is set to "Traditional"
3. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
5. Import the GKD-V into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full". For this backtest, you must test Longs and Shorts separately
7. To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you can test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
█ GKD-C RSX VDI w/ Confidence Bands
What is the VDI (Volatility Direction Index)?
The Volatility Direction Index Index (VDI) is a technical analysis indicator developed by Loxx. It is designed to help traders and investors identify potential trend reversals, confirm existing trends, and recognize overbought or oversold market conditions. VDI is a momentum oscillator that measures the volatility and price direction of an asset over a specified period.
Here's a step-by-step breakdown of how to calculate VDI:
Choose a period (n) over which to calculate the VDI, typically 8 or 10.
Calculate the true range for each day:
True Range = max
Calculate the directional bias for each day:
If (Today's High - Previous Close) > (Previous Close - Today's Low), the directional bias is positive.
If (Today's High - Previous Close) < (Previous Close - Today's Low), the directional bias is negative.
Calculate the VDI for each day with a positive directional bias:
VDI Positive = * 100
Calculate the VDI for each day with a negative directional bias:
VDI Negative = * 100
Calculate the n-day sum of positive VDI values (Sum_Positive_VDI) and the n-day sum of negative VDI values (Sum_Negative_VDI).
Calculate the final Volatility Direction Index Index value:
VDI = (Sum_Positive_VDI - Sum_Negative_VDI) / (Sum_Positive_VDI + Sum_Negative_VDI) * 100
This VDI value can then be plotted on a chart over time to help traders and investors visualize the momentum and volatility of the asset's price.
VDI oscillates between -100 and +100. Positive VDI values indicate bullishness, while negative VDI values suggest bearishness. Values near the extremes (+100 or -100) can be considered overbought or oversold, potentially signaling a trend reversal. Traders often use additional technical analysis tools and techniques to confirm signals generated by the VDI.
What are Confidence Bands?
Confidence bands are computed using the inverse normal CDF as calculated below:
RationalApproximation(float t): This function is an implementation of a rational approximation, which is a technique used to approximate a function using a ratio of two polynomial functions. The function provided here is specific to approximating a particular function, possibly related to the inverse of the cumulative distribution function (CDF) of the standard normal distribution. The function takes a float value t as input and returns an approximation based on the given coefficients.
NormalCDFInverse(float p): This function calculates the inverse of the cumulative distribution function (CDF) for the standard normal distribution (also known as the quantile function or percent-point function). The standard normal distribution is a normal distribution with a mean of 0 and a standard deviation of 1. The input to the function is a probability value p (0 < p < 1), and the output is the corresponding z-score (or standard score) at which the CDF has the value p.
The Normal CDF Inverse function relies on the RationalApproximation function to obtain an approximation of the inverse CDF value. If the probability p is less than 0.5, the function calculates the negative z-score, while for p greater than or equal to 0.5, it calculates the positive z-score. The final output is the z-score corresponding to the input probability p.
How to calculate RSX VDI confidence bands:
1. Set the Confidence Level by clamping the input Confidence Level between 0.0000000001 and 99.9999999999.
2. Set the Confidence Band Shift by taking the maximum of the input Confidence Band Shift and 1.
3. Calculate the Confidence Z-score, a z-score corresponding to the given confidence level, using the Normal CDF Inverse function.
4. Calculate va by checking if Confidence Band Shift is greater than or equal to 0. If it is, calculate the VALUE using the backwards XX many Confidence Band Shift bars. Otherwise, set VALUE to 0.
5. Finally, calculate MERROR, which is the measure of error or confidence interval, using Confidence Z-sore, VALUE, and input Period.
The result, MERROR, represents the confidence interval or bands for the RSX VDI, which can be used in technical analysis to assess the reliability of the indicator and potential price reversals.
What is the RSX?
The Jurik RSX is a technical indicator developed by Mark Jurik to measure the momentum and strength of price movements in financial markets, such as stocks, commodities, and currencies. It is an advanced version of the traditional Relative Strength Index (RSI), designed to offer smoother and less lagging signals compared to the standard RSI.
The main advantage of the Jurik RSX is that it provides more accurate and timely signals for traders and analysts, thanks to its improved calculation methods that reduce noise and lag in the indicator's output. This enables better decision-making when analyzing market trends and potential trading opportunities.
What is RSX VDI w/ Confidence Bands
This indicator calculates the RSX VDI and then wraps that calculation with upper and lower confidence level. There are three types of signals: Levels cross, dynamic middle cross, and signal cross. Levels cross only works if you adjust the Confidence Bands shift upward or adjust the confidence level downward as the likelihood of reaching the default setting of 95% confidence is very low.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-B Baseline
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Stacked 1: None
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 1
Outputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation 2 indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-BT Backtest or GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Stacked 1: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+ or GKD-BT Backtest
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C PA-Adaptive T3 Loxxer [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C PA-Adaptive T3 Loxxer is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: PA-Adaptive T3 Loxxer as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
1-Candle Rule Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close)
2. GKD-B Volatility/Volume agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
4. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
]█ Setting up the GKD
The GKD system involves chaining indicators together. These are the steps to set this up.
Use a GKD-C indicator alone on a chart
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Use a GKD-V indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Use a GKD-B indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Baseline (Baseline, Backtest)
1. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline"
Volatility/Volume (Volatility/Volume, Backte st)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Solo"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Signal Type" setting to "Crossing" (neither traditional nor both can be backtested)
3. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Volatility/Volume"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, a) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Trading" if using a directional GKD-V indicator; or, b) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full" if using a directional or non-directional GKD-V indicator (non-directional GKD-V can only test Longs and Shorts separately)
6. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Side" to "Long" or "Short
7. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
Solo Confirmation Simple (Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
1. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Solo Confirmation Complex without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
6. Import the GKD-C into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Solo Confirmation Complex with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
7. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Full GKD without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
9. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Full GKD with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Import the GKD-C Continuation indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
9. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
10. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Baseline + Volatility/Volume (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, make sure the "Signal Type" setting is set to "Traditional"
3. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
5. Import the GKD-V into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full". For this backtest, you must test Longs and Shorts separately
7. To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you can test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
█ GKD-C PA-Adaptive T3 Loxxer
What is the T3?
The T3 Moving Average (T3MA) is a technical analysis indicator that was developed by Tim Tillson. It is a trend-following indicator that aims to provide a smoother and more accurate representation of price trends than other moving average indicators.
The T3MA is a type of exponential moving average ( EMA ) that is calculated using a series of complex formulas. Unlike a simple or exponential moving average , which use fixed smoothing factors, the T3MA uses a variable smoothing factor that is based on the volatility of the underlying asset. This means that the T3MA is able to adapt to changing market conditions and provide more accurate signals.
The formula for calculating the T3MA is as follows:
T3 = a * EMA1 + (1 - a) * T3
Where:
-T3 is the current value of the T3MA
-EMA1 is the current value of the first EMA
-T3 is the previous value of the T3MA
-a is the smoothing factor, which is based on the volatility of the underlying asset and is calculated using the following formulas:
-c1 = -1 + exp (-sqrt(2) * pi / period)
-c2 = 2 * c1 * c1 + 2 * c1
-c3 = 1 - c1 - c2
-a = c1 * sqrt(period) * (close - T3) + c2 * T3 + c3 * EMA1
In simple terms, the T3MA is calculated by taking a weighted average of two different EMAs, with the weight given to each EMA depending on the volatility of the asset being analyzed. The T3MA is then smoothed using a second smoothing factor, which further reduces noise and improves the accuracy of the indicator.
The T3MA can be used in a variety of ways by traders and analysts. Some common applications include using the T3MA as a trend-following indicator, with buy signals generated when the price of an asset crosses above the T3MA and sell signals generated when the price crosses below. The T3MA can also be used in combination with other indicators and analytical techniques to confirm trading decisions and identify potential trend reversals.
Overall, the T3 Moving Average is a highly sophisticated and complex technical indicator that is designed to provide a more accurate and reliable representation of price trends. While it may be difficult for novice traders to understand and use effectively, experienced traders and analysts may find the T3MA to be a valuable tool in their trading toolbox.
What is the Phase Accumulation Cycle?
The Phase Accumulation Cycle Period by Ehlers is a concept developed by Dr. John Ehlers, an expert in the field of technical analysis and digital signal processing for financial markets. The Phase Accumulation Cycle Period is a technique used to estimate the dominant cycle period in a financial time series, such as stock prices or market indices. It is based on the premise that financial markets are cyclical in nature, and understanding the underlying cycles can help traders and investors make better-informed decisions.
The Phase Accumulation method works by accumulating the phase of the input data over a specific number of bars or periods, and then measuring the difference between the current and prior phase. This difference represents the change in phase over the specified accumulation period. The method uses a combination of digital signal processing techniques, such as complex demodulation and Hilbert Transform, to determine the phase and amplitude of the underlying cycles.
One of the key benefits of the Phase Accumulation Cycle Period is that it is less sensitive to noise and provides a more stable estimation of the cycle period when compared to other methods, such as the traditional spectral analysis techniques. This makes it particularly useful for analyzing noisy financial time series data.
Dr. Ehlers has published several papers and books on the subject, and his work is widely respected in the field of technical analysis. If you are interested in learning more about the Phase Accumulation Cycle Period and other techniques developed by Dr. Ehlers, you may want to explore his publications, such as "Rocket Science for Traders" and "Cycle Analytics for Traders."
My apologies for not providing the details and formulas in my previous response. Here's a more detailed explanation of the Phase Accumulation Cycle Period by Ehlers, including the relevant formulas.
The Phase Accumulation Cycle Period calculation involves the following steps:
1. Apply the Hilbert Transform to the input data: The Hilbert Transform is a mathematical technique used to calculate the instantaneous phase and amplitude of a signal. The formula for the Hilbert Transform (HT) is:
HT(x) = (1/π) * ∫ dτ
Where x(τ) is the input data, t is the time index, and the integral is taken over the entire data length.
2. Calculate the instantaneous phase: The instantaneous phase (φ) is calculated as the arctangent of the ratio between the Hilbert Transform output and the input data.
φ(t) = arctan(HT(x(t)) / x(t))
3. Calculate the phase difference: The phase difference (Δφ) is the difference between the instantaneous phase at the current bar and the previous bar.
Δφ(t) = φ(t) - φ(t-1)
4. Accumulate the phase difference: The accumulated phase difference is the sum of the phase differences over a specified accumulation period (N).
ΣΔφ(t) = Σ for k = 0 to N-1
5. Calculate the average phase change: The average phase change (Δφ_avg) is the accumulated phase difference divided by the accumulation period (N).
Δφ_avg = ΣΔφ(t) / N
6. Estimate the cycle period: The estimated cycle period (P) is calculated using the following formula:
P = (2π) / Δφ_avg
The Phase Accumulation Cycle Period by Ehlers is the estimated cycle period (P) derived from the above calculations. The technique is designed to provide a more accurate and stable estimation of the dominant cycle period in a financial time series, which can be useful for market analysis, trading, and investing.
What is the Loxxer indicator?
The Loxxer Indicator is a technical analysis tool developed by Loxx. It is an oscillator that measures the demand of an asset, helping traders and investors identify potential buying and selling opportunities. The Loxxer Indicator compares the current maximum and minimum prices with those of the previous period, aiming to assess the directional pressure and the possible trend exhaustion points.
The Loxxer Indicator ranges between 0 and 1, with values above 0.7 generally considered overbought and values below 0.3 considered oversold. These overbought and oversold levels can provide potential entry or exit signals for traders.
Here's how the Loxxer Indicator is calculated:
1. Calculate LoxxMax: If the current high minus the previous high is greater than zero, LoxxMax equals the difference. If the result is less than or equal to zero, LoxxMax equals zero.
LoxxMax = max(current high - previous high, 0)
2. Calculate LoxxMin: If the previous low minus the current low is greater than zero, LoxxMin equals the difference. If the result is less than or equal to zero, LoxxMin equals zero.
LoxxMin = max(previous low - current low, 0)
3. Calculate the moving average of LoxxMax for the specified period (N):
LoxxMaxAvg = Simple Moving Average of LoxxMax over N periods
4. Calculate the moving average of LoxxMin for the specified period (N):
LoxxMinAvg = Simple Moving Average of LoxxMin over N periods
5. Calculate the Loxxer Indicator:
Loxxer = LoxxMaxAvg / (LoxxMaxAvg + LoxxMinAvg)
The Loxxer Indicator can be used in various ways, such as generating trading signals, identifying divergence, or confirming trends. Keep in mind that, like any other technical analysis tool, the Loxxer Indicator should be used in conjunction with other tools and techniques to increase the reliability of trading signals.
What is the PA-Adaptive T3 Loxxer?
This indicator computes the Phase Accumulation Cycle Period (dominant cycle period) and subsequently incorporates it into the Loxxer algorithm. Here, the Loxxer algorithm is equipped with T3 filtering. The T3 filter utilizes the Phase Accumulation dominant cycle period as its input for the period. This comprehensive computation generates an exceptionally smooth and rapid indicator.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-B Baseline
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Stacked 1: None
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 1
Outputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation 2 indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-BT Backtest or GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Stacked 1: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+ or GKD-BT Backtest
Additional features will be added in future releases.
GKD-C PA-Adaptive RSX [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-C PA-Adaptive RSX is a Confirmation module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
What is Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System"?
The Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System is a trading system built on the philosophy of the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) algorithmic trading.
What is the NNFX algorithmic trading strategy?
The NNFX (No-Nonsense Forex) trading system is a comprehensive approach to Forex trading that is designed to simplify the process and remove the confusion and complexity that often surrounds trading. The system was developed by a Forex trader who goes by the pseudonym "VP" and has gained a significant following in the Forex community.
The NNFX trading system is based on a set of rules and guidelines that help traders make objective and informed decisions. These rules cover all aspects of trading, including market analysis, trade entry, stop loss placement, and trade management.
Here are the main components of the NNFX trading system:
1. Trading Philosophy: The NNFX trading system is based on the idea that successful trading requires a comprehensive understanding of the market, objective analysis, and strict risk management. The system aims to remove subjective elements from trading and focuses on objective rules and guidelines.
2. Technical Analysis: The NNFX trading system relies heavily on technical analysis and uses a range of indicators to identify high-probability trading opportunities. The system uses a combination of trend-following and mean-reverting strategies to identify trades.
3. Market Structure: The NNFX trading system emphasizes the importance of understanding the market structure, including price action, support and resistance levels, and market cycles. The system uses a range of tools to identify the market structure, including trend lines, channels, and moving averages.
4. Trade Entry: The NNFX trading system has strict rules for trade entry. The system uses a combination of technical indicators to identify high-probability trades, and traders must meet specific criteria to enter a trade.
5. Stop Loss Placement: The NNFX trading system places a significant emphasis on risk management and requires traders to place a stop loss order on every trade. The system uses a combination of technical analysis and market structure to determine the appropriate stop loss level.
6. Trade Management: The NNFX trading system has specific rules for managing open trades. The system aims to minimize risk and maximize profit by using a combination of trailing stops, take profit levels, and position sizing.
Overall, the NNFX trading system is designed to be a straightforward and easy-to-follow approach to Forex trading that can be applied by traders of all skill levels.
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v1.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data between modules. Data is passed between each module as described below:
GKD-B => GKD-V => GKD-C(1) => GKD-C(2) => GKD-C(Continuation) => GKD-E => GKD-BT
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Strategy with 1-3 take profits, trailing stop loss, multiple types of PnL volatility, and 2 backtesting styles
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: PA-Adaptive RSX as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: Williams Percent Range
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD protocol chain.
Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals (based on the NNFX algorithm)
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, or Pullback; entry triggered previously
2. GKD-B Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
3. GKD-C Confirmation Continuation Indicator signals
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
6. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
1-Candle Rule Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Rule Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close )
2. GKD-B Baseline agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
1-Candle Rule Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
4. GKD-C Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
Next Candle:
1. Price retraced (Long: close < close or Short: close > close)
2. GKD-B Volatility/Volume agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
5. GKD-B Baseline agrees
PullBack Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline signal
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle:
1. Price is within a range of 0.2x Volatility and 1.0x Volatility of the Goldie Locks Mean
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 agrees
3. GKD-C Confirmation 2 agrees
4. GKD-V Volatility/Volume Agrees
]█ Setting up the GKD
The GKD system involves chaining indicators together. These are the steps to set this up.
Use a GKD-C indicator alone on a chart
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Use a GKD-V indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Use a GKD-B indicator alone on a chart
**nothing, it's already useable on the chart without any settings changes
Baseline (Baseline, Backtest)
1. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline"
Volatility/Volume (Volatility/Volume, Backte st)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Solo"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Signal Type" setting to "Crossing" (neither traditional nor both can be backtested)
3. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Volatility/Volume"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, a) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Trading" if using a directional GKD-V indicator; or, b) change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full" if using a directional or non-directional GKD-V indicator (non-directional GKD-V can only test Longs and Shorts separately)
6. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Side" to "Long" or "Short
7. If "Backtest Type" is set to "Full": To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
Solo Confirmation Simple (Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
1. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
2. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Solo Confirmation Simple"
Solo Confirmation Complex without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
6. Import the GKD-C into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Solo Confirmation Complex with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Solo Confirmation Complex"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Import the GKD-C indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
7. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Full GKD without Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full wo/ Exits"
9. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Exit or Backtest"
Full GKD with Exits (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Confirmation 1, Confirmation 2, Continuation, Exit, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Chained"
2. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
3. Inside the GKD-C 1 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 1"
4. Import the GKD-V indicator into the GKD-C 1 indicator: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
5. Inside the GKD-C 2 indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Confirmation 2"
6. Import the GKD-C 1 indicator into the GKD-C 2 indicator: "Input into C2"
7. Inside the GKD-C Continuation indicator, change the "Confirmation Type" setting to "Continuation"
8. Import the GKD-C Continuation indicator into the GKD-E indicator: "Input into Exit"
9. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "GKD Full w/ Exits"
10. Import the GKD-E into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into Backtest"
Baseline + Volatility/Volume (Baseline, Volatility/Volume, Backtest)
1. Inside the GKD-V indicator, change the "Testing Type" setting to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
2. Inside the GKD-V indicator, make sure the "Signal Type" setting is set to "Traditional"
3. Import the GKD-B Baseline into the GKD-V indicator: "Input into Volatility/Volume or Backtest (Baseline testing)"
4. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Special" to "Baseline + Volatility/Volume"
5. Import the GKD-V into the GKD-BT Backtest: "Input into C1 or Backtest"
6. Inside the GKD-BT Backtest, change the setting "Backtest Type" to "Full". For this backtest, you must test Longs and Shorts separately
7. To allow the system to open multiple orders at one time so you can test all Longs or Shorts, open the GKD-BT Backtest, click the tab "Properties" and then insert a value of something like 10 orders into the "Pyramiding" settings. This will allow 10 orders to be opened at one time which should be enough to catch all possible Longs or Shorts.
█ GKD-C PA-Adaptive RSX
What is the RSX?
The Jurik RSX is a technical indicator developed by Mark Jurik to measure the momentum and strength of price movements in financial markets, such as stocks, commodities, and currencies. It is an advanced version of the traditional Relative Strength Index (RSI), designed to offer smoother and less lagging signals compared to the standard RSI.
The main advantage of the Jurik RSX is that it provides more accurate and timely signals for traders and analysts, thanks to its improved calculation methods that reduce noise and lag in the indicator's output. This enables better decision-making when analyzing market trends and potential trading opportunities.
What is the Phase Accumulation Cycle?
The Phase Accumulation Cycle Period by Ehlers is a concept developed by Dr. John Ehlers, an expert in the field of technical analysis and digital signal processing for financial markets. The Phase Accumulation Cycle Period is a technique used to estimate the dominant cycle period in a financial time series, such as stock prices or market indices. It is based on the premise that financial markets are cyclical in nature, and understanding the underlying cycles can help traders and investors make better-informed decisions.
The Phase Accumulation method works by accumulating the phase of the input data over a specific number of bars or periods, and then measuring the difference between the current and prior phase. This difference represents the change in phase over the specified accumulation period. The method uses a combination of digital signal processing techniques, such as complex demodulation and Hilbert Transform, to determine the phase and amplitude of the underlying cycles.
One of the key benefits of the Phase Accumulation Cycle Period is that it is less sensitive to noise and provides a more stable estimation of the cycle period when compared to other methods, such as the traditional spectral analysis techniques. This makes it particularly useful for analyzing noisy financial time series data.
Dr. Ehlers has published several papers and books on the subject, and his work is widely respected in the field of technical analysis. If you are interested in learning more about the Phase Accumulation Cycle Period and other techniques developed by Dr. Ehlers, you may want to explore his publications, such as "Rocket Science for Traders" and "Cycle Analytics for Traders."
My apologies for not providing the details and formulas in my previous response. Here's a more detailed explanation of the Phase Accumulation Cycle Period by Ehlers, including the relevant formulas.
The Phase Accumulation Cycle Period calculation involves the following steps:
1. Apply the Hilbert Transform to the input data: The Hilbert Transform is a mathematical technique used to calculate the instantaneous phase and amplitude of a signal. The formula for the Hilbert Transform (HT) is:
HT(x) = (1/π) * ∫ dτ
Where x(τ) is the input data, t is the time index, and the integral is taken over the entire data length.
2. Calculate the instantaneous phase: The instantaneous phase (φ) is calculated as the arctangent of the ratio between the Hilbert Transform output and the input data.
φ(t) = arctan(HT(x(t)) / x(t))
3. Calculate the phase difference: The phase difference (Δφ) is the difference between the instantaneous phase at the current bar and the previous bar.
Δφ(t) = φ(t) - φ(t-1)
4. Accumulate the phase difference: The accumulated phase difference is the sum of the phase differences over a specified accumulation period (N).
ΣΔφ(t) = Σ for k = 0 to N-1
5. Calculate the average phase change: The average phase change (Δφ_avg) is the accumulated phase difference divided by the accumulation period (N).
Δφ_avg = ΣΔφ(t) / N
6. Estimate the cycle period: The estimated cycle period (P) is calculated using the following formula:
P = (2π) / Δφ_avg
The Phase Accumulation Cycle Period by Ehlers is the estimated cycle period (P) derived from the above calculations. The technique is designed to provide a more accurate and stable estimation of the dominant cycle period in a financial time series, which can be useful for market analysis, trading, and investing.
What is the PA-Adaptive RSX?
This indcator calculates a Phase Accumulation Cycle Period (dominant cycle period) and then injects this value into the RSX formula as the period input. This purpose of this indicator is to identify longer price trends.
Requirements
Inputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Continuation: GKD-C Confirmation indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-B Baseline
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-V Volatility / Volume indicator
Stacked 1: None
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 1
Outputs
Confirmation 1: GKD-C Confirmation 2 indicator
Confirmation 2: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Continuation: GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Simple: GKD-BT Backtest
Solo Confirmation Complex: GKD-BT Backtest or GKD-E Exit indicator
Solo Confirmation Super Complex: GKD-C Continuation indicator
Stacked 1: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+
Stacked 2+: GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-B Stacked 2+ or GKD-BT Backtest
Additional features will be added in future releases.
